Development Document for Effluent Limitations Guidelines
 and New Source Performance Standards for the
RED  MEAT  PROCESSING
Segment of the Meat  Product
          and
Rendering Processing

Point Source Category
                 FEBRUARY 1974
      \    U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY

=» ^%if ^ jr          Washington, D.C. 20460

-------

-------
                   DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENT

                           for

             EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES

                           and

             NEW SOURCE PERFORMANCE  STANDARDS



   RED MEAT  PROCESSING SEGMENTS OF  THE MEAT PRODUCTS

                  POINT SOURCE CATEGORY
                      Russell Train
                      Administrator

                       Roger Stelow
Acting Assistant Administrator for  Air & Water Programs
                       Allen Cywin
         Director,  Effluent Guidelines Division

                     Jeffery D. Denit
                     Project Officer
                      February 1974
               Effluent Guidelines  Division
             Office of Air and Water  Programs
         U.  S.  Environmental Protection Agency
                 Washington, D. C.  20460
 For sale by the Superintendent of DocumentB, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.O. 20402 - Price $2,20

-------

-------
                                ABSTRACT
This document presents the findings of an extensive study  of  the  meat
packing  industry by the Environmental Protection Agency for the purpose
of developing effluent limitations guidelines, and Federal standards  of
performance  for  the industry/ to implement Sections 30U and 306 of the
Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972  (the "Act") .

The segments of the meat packing industry included in the study were red
meat slaughterhouses, packinghouses.  Not included were plants that only
process meat  but  do  no  on-site  slaughtering,  rendering  operations
carried  out  off  the site of the packing plant, and all poultry (white
meat)  processing plants.

Effluent limitations guidelines are set forth for the degree of effluent
reduction attainable through the application of  the  "Best  Practicable
Control   Technology  Currently  Available",  and  the  "Best  Available
Technology Economically Achievable", which must be achieved by  existing
point  sources  by  July  1,  1977, and July 1, 1983, respectively.   The
"standards of Performance for New  Sources"  set  forth  the  degree  of
effluent  reduction  which  is achievable through the application of the
best available demonstrated  control  technology,  processes,  operating
methods,  or  other  alternatives.  The proposed recommendations require
the  best  biological  treatment  technology  currently  available   for
discharge  into  navigable  water  bodies  by  July 1, 1977, and for new
source  performance  standards.   This  technology  is  represented   by
anaerobic  plus aerated plus aerobic lagoons with efficient solid-liquid
separation, or their equivalent.  The recommendation for July  1,  1983,
is  for  the best biological, chemical and/or physical treatment and in-
plant  controls.   In  this  instance,  efficient  biological  treat  is
complemented  by water conservation practices, improved nutrient removal
concepts, and water filtration types of final treatment.  When  suitable
land  is  available,  land  disposal  may  be  an  economical  option to
eliminate any direct discharge.  Recycle or reuse of effluents into  the
plant may offer an additional alternative in this regard.

Supportive  data  and rationale for development of the proposed effluent
limitations guidelines and standards of  performance  are  contained  in
this report.

-------

-------
                                CONTENTS
Section

   I.

  II,

 III,
  IV.
CONCLUSIONS

R ECOMMENDATIONS

INTRODUCTION

     Purpose and Authority

     Summary of Methods Used for Development of
     the Effluent Limitations Guidelines and
     standards of Performance

     General Description of the Industry

     Process Description

     Manufacturing Processes

          Stockyards and Pens
          Slaughtering
          Blood Processing
          Viscera Handling
          Cutting,  Hide Processing
          Meat Processing
          Rendering
          Materials Recovery

     Production Classification

     Anticipated Industry Growth

INDUSTRY CATEGORIZATION

     Categorization

     Rationale for Categorization

          Waste Water Characteristics and
          Treatability
          Final Products
          Primary Manufacturing Processes
          secondary Manufacturing Processes
          Raw Materials
          Size, Age, and Location
Page

 1

 3

 5

 5



 6

 9

11

15

15
15
18
18
19
20
20
21

23

23

25

25

27
                                                                    27
                                                                    29
                                                                    30
                                                                    30
                                                                    32
                                                                    33
                               ill

-------
Section

   V.
  VI
 VII
WATER USE AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION

     Waste  Water Characteristics

          Raw Waste characteristics
          Slaughterhouses
          Packinghouses
          Discussion of Raw Wastes

     Process Flow Diagrams

     Water  Use - Wasteload Relationships

     Sources of Waste Water

          Animal Pens
          Slaughtering
          Meat Processing
          secondary Manufacturing Processes
          Cutting
          Clean-Up

SELECTION OF POLLUTANT PARAMETERS

     Selected Parameters

     Rationale for Selection  of Identified Parameters

            BOD (5 day, 20°C biochemical oxygen demand)
            COD (chemical oxygen demand)
            Total suspended solids
            Dissolved solids
            Oil and grease
            Ammonia nitrogen (and  other nitrogen forms)
            Phosphorus
            Temperature
            Fecal coliforms
            pH
CONTROL  AND TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY

     Summary

     In-Plant Control Techniques

          Pen Wastes
          Blood Handling
          Paunch
          Viscera Handling
          Troughs
          Rendering
Page

 35

 35

 35
 36
 38
 41

 44

 49

 51

 51
 51
 52
 53
 54
 54

 57

 57

 57

 57
 58
 58
 59
 61
 51
 52
 63
 65
 66
 67

 57

 57

 59
 59
 69
 70
 70
 70
                                   IV

-------
section
Page
 VII.    CONTROL AND TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY  (Continued)

                   Hide Processing
                   Scald Tank
                   Pickle and Curing Solutions
                   Water Conservation Practices
                   Clean-up Operations

              In-Plant Primary Treatment

                   Flow Equalization
                   Screens
                   Catch Basins
                   Dissolved Air Flotation

              Secondary Waste Water Treatment Systems

                   Anaerobic Processes
                   Aerated Lagoons
                   Aerobic Lagoons
                   Activated Sludge
                   Trickling Filter
                   Rotating Biological Contactor
                   Performance of Various  Secondary
                   Treatment Systems

              Tertiary and Advanced Treatment

                   Chemical Precipitation  of Phosphorus
                   Sand Filter
                   Microscreen-Microstrainer
                   Nitrification-Denitrification
                   Ammonia Stripping
                   Spray/Flood Irrigation
                   Ion Exchange
                   Carbon Adsorption
                   Reverse osmosis
                   Electrodialysis

VIII.    COST, ENERGY, AND NON-WATEK QUALITY ASPECTS

              Summary
              "Typical" Plant
              Waste Water Treatment Systems
              Treatment and Control Costs

                   In-Plant Control Costs
                   Secondary and Tertiary Treatment Costs
 71
 71
 71
 72
 73

 74

 74
 74
 76
 77

 83

 83
 85
 86
 89
 91
 92
 94
 94

 95

 95
 97
 99
100
103
105
108
111
114
115

119

119
121
125
128

128
129

-------
Section                                                              Page

VIII.    COST, ENERGY, AND NON-WATER QUALITY ASPECTS  (Continued)

                   Investment Costs Assumptions                       129
                   Annual Costs Assumptions                           132

              Energy Requirements                                     133

              Non-Water Pollution by Waste Water Treatment  Systems    134

                   Solid Wastes                                       134
                   Air Pollution                                      135
                   Noise                                              136

  IX.    EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE  APPLICATION
         OF THE BEST PRACTICABLE CONTROL TECHNOLOGY CURRENTLY
         AVAILABLE—EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES                  137

              Introduction                                            137

              Effluent Reduction Attainable Through The  Application
              of Best Pollution Control Technology  Currently
              Available                                               138

              Identification of Best Pollution Control Technology
              Currently Available                                     138

              Rationale for the Selection of Best Pollution
              Control Technology currently Available                  141

                   Age and Size of Equipment and Facilities          141
                   Total cost of Application in Relation to
                      Effluent Reduction Benefits                     142
                   Engineering Aspects of Control Technique
                      Applications                                    142
                   Process Changes                                    148
                   Non-Water Quality Environmental  Impact            148

   X.    EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE  APPLICATION
         OF THE BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY ECONOMICALLY
         ACHIEVABLE—EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES                  149

              Introduction                                            149

              Effluent Reduction Attainable Through Application
              of the Best Available Technology Economically
              Achievable                                              150

              Identification of the Best Available  Technology
              Economically Achievable                                 150
                                   VI

-------
Section
                                                                     Page
   X.    EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE APPLICATION
         OF THE BEST AVAILABLE  TECHNOLOGY ECONOMICALLY
         ACHIEVABLE—EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES

              Rationale  for Selection of the Best Available
              Technology Economically Achievable

                   Age and size of  Equipment and Facilities
                   Total Cost of Application in Relation to
                      Effluent  Reduction Benefits
                   Engineering  Aspects of Control Technique
                      Application
                   Process Changes
                   Non-Water Quality Impact

  XI.    NEW SOURCE PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

              Introduction

              Effluent Reduction Attainable for New Sources

              Identification of New Source Control Technology

              Rationale for Selection

 XII,    ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

XIII.    REFERENCES

 XIV.    GLOSSARY
154

154
154
155
155
156

157

157

158

160

161

163

165

169

-------

-------
                                FIGURES
Number
   1.    Process Flow in a Packing Plant
   2.    Process Flow for Simple slaughterhouse
   3.    Waste Flow Diagram for a Packinghouse
   4.    Categorization of Meat Packing Plants
   5.    operating and Waste Water Flow chart for simple
              and Complex Slaughterhouses
   6.    Operating and Waste Water Flow chart for Low- and
              High-Processing Packinghouses
   7.    Typical Waste Water Treatment System Without
              Dissolved Air Flotation
   8.    Typical Waste Water Treatment System Including
              Dissolved Air Flotation
   9.    separate Treatment of Grease-Bearing, Nongrease-
              Bearing and Manure-Bearing Waste Waters
  10.    Effect of Water Use on Wasteload for Individual
              Plants
  11.    Suggested Meat Packing Industry Waste Reduction
              Program
  12.    Dissolved Air Flotation
  13.    Process Alternatives for Dissolved Air Flotation
  14.    Anaerobic Contact Process
  15.    Activated Sludge Process
  16.    Chemical Precipitation
  17.    Sand Filter System
  18.    Microscreen/Microstrainer
  19.    Nitrification/Denitrification
Page
 13
 14
 16
 28

 37

 40

 45

 47

 48

 50

 68
 79
 eo
 86
 89A
 96
 97
 99
 101

-------
Number
  20.
  21.
  22.
  23.
  24.
  25.
                  FIGURES  (Cont'd.)

Ammonia stripping
Spray/Flood Irrigation  System
Ion Exchange
Carbon Adsorption
Reverse Osmosis
Electrodialysis
Page
 104
 106
 109
 112
 114
 116
                                     x

-------
TABLES
Number
   1.
   1A

   2.

   3.
   5.

   6.

   7.

   8.

   9.
  10.
  11.
  12.
  13.
  14.

  15.
  16.

  17.

  18.
Ccmnercial Slaughter in 48 States
Estimates of the Distribution of Primary Raw Materials
    by Subcategory
Summary  of  Plant and Raw Waste Characteristics
      for Simple Slaughterhouses
Summary  of  Plant and Raw Waste Characteristics
      for complex Slaughterhouses
Summary  of  Plant and Raw Waste Characteristics
      for Low-Processing Packinghouses
Summary  of  Plant and Raw Waste Characteristics
      for High-Processing Packinghouses
Performance  of Various Secondary Treatment
      Systems
Average  Total Waste Treatment Investment  Costs  per
      Plant  to Achieve a Given Level of Effluent Quality.
Estimated Total Investment Cost to the Industry to
      Achieve a Given Level of Effluent Quality  from
      Present Level of Treatment
Total Increase in Annual cost of Waste Treatment
Waste Treatment Systems, Their Use and Effectiveness
In-Plant control Equipment Cost Estimates
Secondary Waste Treatment System Costs
Advanced Waste Treatment System Costs
Recommended  Effluent Limit Guidelines for
      July 1, 1977
Adjustments  for Exceptions in Plant Subcategories
Recommended  Effluent Limit Guidelines for
      July 1, 1983
Adjustments  for Exception in All Plant Subcategories —
      1983
Adjustment Factors for Exceptions  in Operations in any Plant
      Subcategory — New Source Performance Standards
                                  1C

                                  32

                                  39

                                  39

                                  43
                                  43

                                  94A

                                 120

                                 123
                                 123
                                 124
                                 123
                                 130
                                 131

                                 139
                                 140

                                 151

                                 152-
XI

-------

-------
                               SECTION I

                              CONCLUSIONS
A  conclusion  of this study is that the meat packing industry comprises
four subcategories:

         Simple Slaughterhouses
         Complex Slaughterhouses
         Low-Processing Packinghouses
         High-Processing Packinghouses

The major criterion for the establishment of the categories was  the  5-
day  biochemical  oxygen  demand  (BODS) in the plant waste water.  Other
criteria were the primary  products  produced  and  the  secondary  (by-
product) processes employed.

The wastes from all subcategories are substantially organic in character
and are amenable to biological treatment.

Discharge  limits  recommended  for  1977 that represent the performance
average for the best treatment systems in  the  industry  for  the  four
subcategories have been developed for BODjj, TSS, pH, fecal coliform, and
oil  and  grease.   The same limits are recommended for new sources with
additional  requirements  for  controlling  ammonia  to  a  level  again
commensurate  with  performance of the best existing, fully demonstrated
treatment systems.  It is estimated that the costs  of  achieving  these
limits  by  all  plants  within  the industry is between $50-70 million.
These costs would increase the capital investment  in  the  industry  by
about  three  percent and would equal about 20 percent of the industry's
1971 capital investment.

For  1983/  effluent  limits  were  determined  as   representative   of
performance  by  best  available  technology  for the industry for 5-day
biochemical oxygen demand  (BODS)   and  suspended  solids.   Limits  for
ammonia,  fecal  coliform, pH and Oil and Grease were established on the
basis of both performance of the  very  best  in-plant  and  end-of-pipe
waste   water  controls  in  the  industry  and  transfer  of  available
technology from other industries.   It is, also,  concluded  that,  where
suitable  and  adequate land is available, land disposal is a economical
option.  It is estimated  that  the  costs  above  those  for  1977  for
achieving  the  1983  limits by all plants within the industry are about
$107 million.  These costs would further increase the capital investment
irf the industry by about six percent, and would equal about  44  percent
of the industry's 1971 capital investment.

-------

-------
                               SECTION II

                            RECOMMENDATIONS
Guideline  recommendations for discharge to navigable waters for July 1,
1977, are based on  the  characteristics  of  well  operated  biological
treatment  plants.   The  guidelines for 5-day biochemical oxygen demand
(BODS)  range, for example, from 0.12 kg/1000 kg live weight killed (LWK)
for simple slaughterhouses to 0.24 kg/1000 kg LWK for an  average  high-
processing  packinghouse.   Other  major parameters that are limited are
suspended solids, oil and grease/ fecal coliform, and pH.
Recommended New Source standards are the same
with additional requirements for controlling.
as  the  1977  guidelines
Guidelines  recommended  for  1983 are considerably more stringent.  For
example,  BOD5  limits  range  from  0.03  kg/1000  kg  LWK  for  simple
slaughterhouses  to  0.08  kg/1000 kg LWK for an average high-processing
packinghouse.  Limits are also placed on the other parameters  mentioned
above,   with  particular  attention  to  the  ammonia  discharge.   The
suspended solids range from 0.05 to 0.10 kg/1000 kg LWK.

For  the  effluent  limitations  for  1977,  1983   and   standards   of
performance,  adjustments  for  BOD5,  TSS,  and Ammonia (as needed)  are
recommended  for  limitations  affecting  plants  which  produce   final
products  using raw materials  (animals, blood viscera, etc.) slaughtered
at a different site and "imported" for  use  at  the  site.   Means  for
determining  the  weight  of animals slaughtered at other plants  (termed
equivalent live weight killed -  ELWK)   are  recommended  to  assist  in
uniform  application  of  the  adjustments.   A  similar mechanism using
empirically derived relationships for BOD5 and TSS  is  recommended  for
the high-processing packinghouse subcategory.

-------

-------
                              SECTION III

                              INTRODUCTION
Section  301(b)  of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of
1972 (the Act) requires the achievement by not later than July 1,  1977,
of  effluent  limitations  for  point sources, other than publicly owned
treatment works,  which  are  based  on  the  application  of  the  best
practicable  control  technology  currently  available as defined by the
Administrator pursuant to Section 304 (b) of  the  Act.   Section  301 (b)
also  requires  the  achievement  by  not  later  than  July 1, 1983, of
effluent limitations  for  point  sources,  other  than  publicly  owned
treatment  works,  which  are  based  on  the  application  of  the best
available  technology  economically  achievable  which  will  result  in
reasonable  further progress toward the national goal of eliminating the
discharge  of  all  pollutants,  as  determined   in   accordance   with
regulations  issued  by  the Administrator pursuant to Section 304 (b) of
the Act.  Section 306 of the Act requires the achievement by new sources
of a Federal standard of performance providing for the  control  of  the
discharge  of  pollutants which reflects the greatest degree of effluent
reduction which the methods, or  other  alternatives,  including,  where
practicable, a standard permitting no discharge of pollutants.

Section  304(b)   of the Act requires the Administrator to publish within
one year of enactment of the Act, regulations providing  guidelines  for
effluent  limitations  setting  forth  the  degree of effluent reduction
attainable through the  application  of  the  best  practicable  control
technology  currently  available  and  the  degree of effluent reduction
attainable through the application  of  the  best  available  technology
economically achievable including treatment techniques, process and pro-
cedure  innovations,  operation  methods  and  other  alternatives.  The
regulations proposed herein set forth  effluent  limitations  guidelines
pursuant  to Section 304 (b) of the Act for the red meat slaughtering and
packing plant subcategory within the meat products source category.

Section 306 of the Act requires the Administrator, within one year after
a category of sources is  included  in  a  list  published  pursuant  to
Section  306(b)    (1) (A) of the Act, to propose regulations establishing
Federal  standards  of  performances  for  new   sources   within   such
categories.   The  Administrator  published  in  the Federal Register of
January 16, 1973  (38  F.R.  162U),  a  list  of  27  source  categories.
Publication  of the list constituted announcement of the Administrator's
intention of establishing, under section 306, standards  of  performance
based  upon  best  available  demonstrated  technology applicable to new
sources for the red meat  slaughtering  and  packing  plant  subcategory

-------
within the meat products source category, which was included in the list
published January 16, 1973.

        SUMMARY OF METHODS USEpi_FOR^DEygLOPMENT_QF_THE_..EFFLUENT
          LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS~OF PERFORMANCE
The   effluent  limitations  guidelines  and  standards  of  performance
proposed herein were developed  in  the  following  manner.   The  point
source category was first studied for the purpose of determining whether
separate   limitations  and  standards  are  appropriate  for  different
segments within a point  source  category.   This  analysis  included  a
determination  of  whether  differences  in  raw  material used, product
produced,  manufacturing  process  employed,  age,  size,  waste   water
constituents, and other factors require development of separate effluent
limitations  and  standards  for  different segments of the point source
category.  The raw waste characteristics  for  each  segment  were  then
identified.   This  included an analysis of (1)  the source and volume of
water used in the process employed and the source  of  waste  and  waste
waters in the plant; and (2) the constituents (including thermal) of all
waste  waters  including  potentially  hazardous  constituents and other
constituents which result in taste, odor, and color in water or  aquatic
organisms.   The constituents of waste waters which should be subject to
effluent  limitations  guidelines  and  standards  of  performance  were
identified.

The  known  range  of control and treatment technologies existing within
each category was identified.   This  included  identification  of  each
distinct  control  and treatment technology, including an identification
in terms of the amount  of  constituents  (including  thermal)   and  the
chemical, physical, and biological characteristics of pollutants, and of
the  effluent  levels  resulting  from  the  application  of each of the
treatment and  control  technologies.   The  problems,  limitations  and
reliability  of  each  treatment and control technology and the required
implementation time was also  identified.   In  addition,  the  nonwater
quality  environmental impact, such as the effects of the application of
such technologies upon other pollution problems,  including  air,  solid
waste,   noise   and   radiation   were  also  identified.   The  energy
requirements of each of  the  control  and  treatment  technologies  was
identified as well as the cost of the application of such technologies.

The  information,  as  outlined  above,  was  then evaluated in order to
determine what levels of technology constituted  the  "best  practicable
control  technology  currently  available",  "best  available technology
economically achievable" and the "best  available  demonstrated  control
technology,  processes,  operating  methods, or other alternatives".  In
identifying such technologies, various factors were  considered.   These
included  the total cost of application of technology in relation to the
effluent reduction benefits to be achieved from  such  application,  the

-------
age  of  equipment  and  facilities  involved, the process employed, the
engineering aspects of the  application  of  various  types  of  control
techniques,  process  changes,  nonwater  quality  environmental  impact
(including energy requirements) and other factors.
The data for identification and analyses were derived from a  number  of
sources.   These  sources  included  Refuse Act Permit Program data, EPA
research information; data and information from the North Star  Research
and  Development  Institute files and reports, a voluntary questionnaire
issued  through  the  American  Meat  Institute  (AMI),   the   National
Independent  Meat  Packers  Association (NIMPA) , and Western States Meat
Packers Association  (WSMPA); qualified technical consultation; and  site
visits and interviews at several meat packing plants and slaughterhouses
in  various  areas  of  the  United  States.   Questionnaire information
provided about 80 percent  of  the  raw  data  used  to  categorize  the
industry, to characterize the raw waste, and to assess the effectiveness
of  various  treatment systems.  Information from the USDA was primarily
product and production data.  Data from the Refuse  Act  Permit  Program
(RAPP)   were  of  very limited value; they were used primarily to verify
the types of treatment used by various plants and to assist in selecting
the pollutant parameters listed  in  Section  VI.   Although  data  were
obtained  for  104 plants, only 85 of the plants were identifiable.  The
data for identifiable plants were the only data used for  categorization
and  raw  waste  characterization.   The  other  sources, including site
visits and interviews, were used to fill in the information gaps and  to
provide additional insight and understanding to develop the rationale in
categorization.

The   data  were  coded  and  stored  in  a  computer  for  analysis  in
categorizing the industry and characterizing the raw wastes.  Originally
the data were listed as 81 numeric or  non-numeric  variables.   Numeric
values  were  available for the six raw waste variables  (see Section V) ,
and for kill, flow, processed meat production, and  amount  of  cutting.
The  non-numeric  variables  described  the  various methods of handling
blood, paunch, viscera, hair, hides, the types and methods of rendering,
and the sampling procedure used to obtain waste  water  samples.    where
appropriate, missing data were listed as a separate variable.   The first
attempt  to categorize the industry was based on a correlation analysis,
but no useful pattern or  correlation  was  found  encompassing  the  81
variables and the 85 plants.

Based  on   knowledge  of  the  industry  and the results of the initial
correlation analysis, some variables with a presumed  equivalent  effect
on  raw  waste were combined, and others with little or no effect on raw
waste were eliminated.  This reduced the number of variables from 81  to
53.   This  analytical  process was repeated and the number of variables
was again reduced, this time from 53 to 26.  For  example,  animal  type
was  eliminated  as  a  variable  because no significant correlation was

-------
found between it and raw waste.   Also,  the  blood  handling  processes
involving  either  blood  water  evaporation  or whole blood drying were
lumped together as a single variable because the waste load from  either
process is similar.

The  first  analysis did not result in any reasonable grouping of plants
by raw waste load.  The second step produced ten groups of  plants—four
groups  of  slaughterhouses  and  six  of packinghouses.   However, there
remained  some  overlap  of  BOD5  distribution  between   the   groups,
particularly  for  the six groups of packinghouses.  Additional analysis
revealed a positive correlation quantity of processed meat products  for
packinghouses.   The  six  packinghouse groups could be combined to form
two  distinct  subcategories  with  reasonably  distinctive  waste  load
distributions.    The  two  subcategories  are  called  low-  and  high-
processing packinghouses.  The distinction between them,  as described in
detail in Section  IV,  is  based  on  the  quantity  of  production  of
processed meat products relative to the quantity of animals slaughtered.

To  achieve a more consistent and useful grouping of slaughterhouses, an
empirical weighting factor was assigned  to  each  secondary  processing
technique;  this  factor  reflected  the  relative  contribution of each
technique to  the  raw  waste  load  (see  Section  IV).    Two  distinct
subcategories  of  slaughterhouses  were identified; one had plants with
empirical weighting factors adding up to less than U.O,  and  the  other
included  those plants totalling more than U.O.  These two subcategories
were termed simple and complex slaughterhouses.  The raw waste data were
then statistically  analyzed  for  each  subcategory;  the  results  are
presented in Section V.

The empircal weighting factors listed in Section IV were, in some cases,
calculated  from  raw  data obtained from the sources mentioned above or
from  published  information;  in  other  cases  they  were  based  upon
experience  and  judgment.   The credibility of the weighting factors is
based on the fact that the numbers used are good predictors of raw waste
load relative to in-plant operations and also  to  the  fact  that  they
explain  differences  in  raw  waste  load  between  plants  in the same
subcategory but with different in-plant operations.

The value of 1.5 kg BODS per  1000  kg  LWK  for  hide  processing,  for
example,  was obtained in two ways:  first, from the raw waste data from
two hide curing plants, and second, from the difference  between  actual
and  expected  raw  waste  load from a slaughterhouse killing about 1500
head per day, but processing about 7000 hides per day.  The value of 1.0
kg BODS per 1000 kg LWK for wet dumping of paunch  was  calculated  from
data  provided  in  reference  12.   Assumptions were made that the BOD5
waste load is caused by the loss of most of the water-soluble portion of
paunch contents; that 71 percent of the weight of the paunch is lost  to
the  sewer  as  liquid;  that the BODS of the liquid is 28,240 mg/1; and
that there are 50 kg of paunch contents per 1000 kg LWK.   Therefore, for

-------
a weight of 454 kg  (1000 pounds) per head of cattle, the  paunch  factor
is  calculated  to  be   (18,240  x  10-6  x  50  x 0.71) or about 1,0 kg
BOD5/1000 kg LWK (1 Ib BOD5/10CO kg LWK).

The value of 1.2 kg BOD5/1000 kg  LWK  for  coagulating  and  separating
blood, with the blood water sewered, was calculated assuming 35 kg blood
per  1000  kg LWK.  The blood water was assumed to have a BOD5 of 40,000
mg/1 and to account for 82.4% of the weight of  the  whole  blood.   The
value  of  2.0  kg  BODS  per  1000  kg  LWK for wet and low temperature
rendering was obtained by assuming 150 kg rendered material per 1000  kg
LWK,  and  a liquid effluent weight equal to 45 percent of the weight of
rendered material.  The BOD5 of the liquid  was  assumed  to  be  30/000
mg/1.   All  remaining  factors presented in section IV under "Secondary
Manufacturing Processes"—whole blood drying, dry rendering, and various
method  of  hair  and  viscera  processing—were  estimated   based   on
experience  and  an  engineering  knowledge  of  the  processes  and the
effluent characteristics involved.

All  references  used  in  developing  the   guidelines   for   effluent
limitations and standards of performance for new sources reported herein
are included in section XIII of this document.

                  GENERAL.DESCRIPTION OF_THE_INDUSTRY

Meat packing plants carry out the slaughtering and processing of cattle,
calves,  hogs,  and  sheep  for the preparation of meat products and by-
products from these animals.  The plants in  this  industry  range  from
plants that carry out only one operation, such as slaughtering, to full-
line  plants  that  not only slaughter, but also carry out processing to
varying degrees (manufacturing of meat products such as sausages,  cured
hams,   smoked   products,   etc).   The  amount  of  processing  varies
considerably, because some process only a portion of their  kill,  while
others process not only their kill, but also the kill from other plants.
Most  full-line  plants  (packinghouses)  and  many slaughterhouses also
render by-products; edible and inedible by-products  are  rendered  from
edible fats and trimmings and from inedible materials, respectively.

Reportedly,  there  were  5991 meat slaughtering plants in these 48 con-
tiguous states and Hawaii on March 1,  1973.  1   Of  these,  1364  were
federally  inspected.    The industry produced about 37 billion pounds of
fresh, canned,  cured,  smoked,  and  frozen  meat  products  per  year,
Perhaps 85 percent of the plants in the industry are small plants (local
meat  lockers,  etc.  handling  less  than  43,000 kg or 100,000 Ibs. of
animals per day)  for  which  waste  load  data  are  almost  universally
unavailable.   The remaining 15 percent of the plants account for by far
the largest part—probably over 90 percent—of the production, and thus,
of the waste load.  In 1966, about 70 percent of all waste water in  the
meat  packing  industry  went  to municipal systems; at that time it was
projected that, by 1972, 80 percent would  be  discharged  to  municipal

-------
systems.   It  was  estimated that  in  1962  65  percent of the total waste
water flow from all small plants  in the  U.S.,   discharged  to  municipal
systems; 2 the figure  is undoubtedly higher today.

While  the  industry   is  spread  over  much  of  the country,  the states of
Nebraska and Iowa led  the nation  in  beef   slaughter  with  nearly  4.7
million  head  each in 1972. *  Between  them,  these two states accounted
for over 26 percent of the beef production  in   the  nation.   The  other
states  making  up  the  first ten  in  beef  slaughter, each  with over one
million  head,  are  Texas,  California,  Kansas,  Colorado,  Minnesota,
Illinois, Wisconsin, and Ohio.

Iowa  led  in  hog  slaughter  by  a wide margin, slaughtering nearly 21
million animals in 1971 for  nearly  25  percent  of  the  national  produc-
tion.   The  second  state,  Illinois,  slaughtered about 6.3 million; the
rest of the first ten  include, in order,  Minnesota, Pennsylvania,  Ohio,
Michigan, Indiana, Wisconsin, Virginia,  and Tennessee.
                Table 1.    Commercial Slaughter in 48 States

Beef
Hogs
Calves
Sheep & lambs
TOTAL
Live Wed
Killc
(millic
of pounc
1971
36,588
22,535
919
1,111
61,153
.ght
id
ms
Is)
1972
37,126
20,249
767
1,081
59,223
Percent
of Total
in 1972
62,7
34.2
1.3
1.8
100.0
Percent
Change
Since
1971
+1.5
-10.1
-16.6
- 2.7
- 3.2
      Source:  Livestock Slaughter,  Current Summary, 1972.1
Colorado,   California,  and Texas led in sheep and lambs, with about 1,8,
1.7,  and  1.5  million head, respectively.  New York led  in  calves  with
0.6U   million  head, followed by New Jersey with 0*28, Pennsylvania with
0.25,  and Wisconsin with 0.23 million.
                                   10

-------
The total live weight of livestock slaughtered was about  three  percent
lower  in  1972  than  in 1971, with only beef showing a small increase.
Table 1 lists the 1971 and 1972 slaughter in terms of live weight killed
(LWK).  Beef, with nearly 63 percent, and hogs, with  over  34  percent,
account for about 97 percent of the total slaughter.

Waste  Waters  from slaughtering of animals,  the processing of meat and
the associated facilities and operations  (stock  yards,  rendering,  and
feed manufacturing)  contain organic matter  (including grease), suspended
solids,  and  inorganic  materials  such as phosphates and salts.  These
materials enter the waste stream as blood, meat and fat, meat  extracts,
paunch  contents,  bedding,  manure,  curing and pickling solutions, and
caustic or alkaline detergents.

                          PROCESS.DESCRIPTION

A general flowsheet of a typical full-line packing plant,  or  "packing-
house",  is  shown in Figure 1.  Such a plant is a "packinghouse" rather
than a "slaughterhouse" by  virtue  of  the  "processing"  step.   As  a
packinghouse,  processing  will  include  a  wide  range  and  volume of
products.  For example, processed products maybe more  for  the  animals
killed  at the site.  Such a packinghouse is termed "low processing." On
the other hand, a packinghouse may bring in carcasses from other  plants
and  process  much more than is killed at the site.  Such a packinghouse
is termed "high processing".  Less  complete  plants  would  operate  on
appropriate  parts  of  the flowsheet of Figure 1.  For example, primary
processes  through   cooling   of   carcasses   are   typical   of   all
slaughterhouses,   or  abattoirs.   The  secondary  processes  of  blood
processing, hide processing, and rendering may or may not be carried out
in the slaughterhouse.  Most pork  plants  include  processing  to  some
extent; many beef plants, however, are only abattoirs.  A slaughterhouse
may  have  all  of  the  operations  of  a  packinghouse, except for the
processing, cutting and deboning steps, as noted in Figure  1.   Such  a
slaughterhouse, based on high waste load from secondary processes, would
be  termed  a  "complex" slaughterhouse.  A slaughterhouse may, also, be
extremely simple; the simplest kind, with no  secondary  processing,  is
shown in Figure 2.  If the plant has relatively few secondary processes,
and  those processes are of a type that give a low waste load, the plant
is termed a "simple" slaughterhouse.

The meat packing operations begin at the point at which  animals  arrive
at the plant and carry through the shipping of the product to the whole-
sale trade (or sometimes directly to the retailer).  In the case of very
small  operations  such  as meat lockers, the product may go directly to
the consumer.  All processes and handling methods and  their  management
are  considered  part  of  the plant system.  These include not only the
processes directed toward the production of food  products,  but,  also,
those  involved  in  recovery  of  materials  of  value  for  by-product
manufacture, such as animal feed  ingredients.   The  latter  processes.
                                  11

-------
indicated  as  secondary  processes  in Figure 1, include those recovery
steps such as screening and gravity separation for proteinaceous  solids
and  grease, and serve to reduce the plant waste load.  Hence, processes
often considered primary waste treatment are actually part of the  plant
system, even though their effectiveness will have a large bearing on the
plant's raw waste load.  For the purposes of this study, "primary" waste
treatment refers to these in-plant control measures.

The  number  of  processes  carried  out  and  the way in which they are
carried out varies from plant to plant,  and  has  an  effect  upon  the
effluent  treatment  requirements.   It is convenient to discuss them in
terms of the processes listed at the beginning of the next sub-section.
                                  12

-------
   1
    o>
I
o
f
%
8.
                          Processes
              Primary
  Secondary
             Animals
             Livestock

              Pens
              Killing
9 Blood Processing
        Process  Water
  Viscera  Handling
        i
                                       Inedible
                                      Rendering
                                        Edible
                                      Rendering
                                                          Products
Hide Removal
Hog Dehairing
•>

Hide Processing
Hair Recovery
x.

•Dried Blood



 Hides


 Hog Hair



'Edible Offat
                          •>Tripe ,  etc
                          -> Carcasses
                            By-Products
                                                           •»Cut Meal
                            Lard

                            Edible tallow
                                                           ->Meat Products
      Source:  Industrial Waste  Study of the Meat Product Industry



                Figure 1.  Process Flow  in a Packing  Plant
                                  13

-------
        Animals
            x
         Livestock

          Pens
          Killing
       Hide Removal

      Hog  Dehairing
        Eviscerating

         Trimming
          Cooling
      to
   Outside
   Processing
   Minor By-Product
     Processing
Carcasses
Figure 2.  Process Flow for  Slaughterhouse

-------
                        MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

Production related activities at meat packing plants include;
    1.
    2.
    3.

    5*,


    6.
Animal stockyards or pens
Slaughtering, which in turn, includes:
     Killing
     Blood processing
     Viscera handling and offal washing
     Hide processing
Cutting and deboning
Meat processing
Rendering
     Edible
     Inedible
Materials recovery  (primary separation)
As indicated in a general waste flow diagram for a packinghouse,  Figure
3,  all  of  these processes contribute to the raw waste load except the
materials recovery or primary separation  step;  this  removes  material
that would otherwise be discharged.
                          Stockyards and Pens
In  most  meat packing plants, animals are held in holding pens for less
than one day.  The animals are usually watered but not fed while waiting
their turn for slaughter.  The pens are  often  covered  for  protection
from  the  elements,  and sometimes are enclosed.  In winter in northern
climates they may be heated  enough  to  minimize  condensation.   Waste
water  results  from  watering troughs, from periodic washdown, and from
liquid wastes from the animals.  Runoff, if the pen is not covered, also
contributes wasteload.  These waste waters  are  usually  contained  and
enter  the  sewer  downstream  of  any materials recovery processes, but
before biological treatment.
                              Slaughtering
The slaughtering of animals includes the killing  (stunning,  sticking—
cutting  the jugular vein, bleeding) and hide removal for cattle, calves
and sheep, and scalding and dehairing for hogs; eviscerating; washing of
the carcasses, and cooling.  In the present context blood, viscera,  and
hide processing are included as subprocesses.  Not all plants carry out
                                  15

-------
        Waste

   Solid       Liquid
                   Processes
          Primary            Secondary
                         Animals
                                             Blood Processing
                                             Hide Processing
                                               Hair Recovery
                                             Viscera Handling
     1^
Inedible
Rendering
fe-
                                                 Edible
                                                Rendering
                 r
__^_,
I Solid Waste
I Composting'
I  Land Fill  I
l_
            Secondary'
            Treatment I*
            	..	)
          Final Effluent



        Figure  3.    Waste  Water  Flow Diagram  for a
                    Packinghouse.
                           16

-------
all  operations;  for example, some only follow a narrower definition by
shipping out blood, hides, and viscera for processing elsewhere.

Animals taken from the pens are immobilized upon entering the kill  area
by chemical, mechanical or electrical means.  Cattle are usually stunned
by a blow to the brain.  A steel pin driven by a powder charge or by air
pressure  delivers  the blow.  Hogs are immobilized by an electric shock
from electrodes placed on the head and back, or by running them  through
a tunnel where they breath a carbon-dioxide atmosphere.  The latter is
becoming  rare.   stunned  cattle  are  suspended  by a hind leg from an
overhead rail for sticking and bleeding.  Immobilized hogs are hung over
a bleeding trough or are placed on a conveyor with their  heads  hanging
over  the  bleeding  trough.  When they are stuck, the blood drains into
the trough for collection.  During bleeding, the conveyor  carrying  the
animal  moves slowly over the trough or gutter that catches the blood so
it can be collected for blood processing.  Sheep, lambs, and calves  are
generally  handled  like  cattle,  some blood spills or splashes outside
the collecting area, especially as the carcasses  are  conveyed  to  the
next  operation.  Also, clean-up operations wash considerable blood into
the sewer.

Following bleeding, the hides are removed from the  cattle,  usually  by
mechanical   means.    Before   pulling,   the  hide  is  separated  (by
conventional  or  air-driven,  hand-operated  knives)   sufficiently  for
fastening  to  the  hide puller.  Air knives are gaining favor because a
skinner can be trained to use them very quickly and there is less chance
of damaging the hide.  The most common hide puller pulls the hide  "up";
i.e.,  from  the  neck  to the tail, after the head is removed,  A newer
puller pulls downward, over the  head.   A  traveling  cage  places  the
operator  at  the  proper  level  for skinning and attaching the puller.
Very small plants skin by hand.  Some blood  and  tissue  falls  to  the
floor  from  this  operation,  or blood even splashes on walls.  Much is
collected, but some reaches the sewer, particularly during clean-up.

The hogs are usually not skinned, but are passed through a scalding tank
of water at about 130°F, then dehaired.   The  dehairing  machine  is  a
rotating  drum  containing  rubber  fins.  As the hog passes through the
drum, the rubber fins abrade off the hair and water  constantly  flowing
through  the  machine  carries  the  hair to screens or other dewatering
device for recovery.   In  small  plants,  dehairing  is  often  a  hand
operation.   The  hair  is sometimes baled and sold for such uses as the
manufacture of natural bristle  brushes,  and  for  furniture  stuffing.
Occasionally,  it is hydrolyzed and dried for use in animal feed.  Often
it is disposed of as solid waste.  Following  dehairing,  hog  carcasses
are  singed  for  final hair removal, and sprayed with water to cool and
wash.  They are inspected and trimmed to remove any  remaining  hair  or
other  flaws.   Scald  water  and dehairing and wash water contain hair,
soil, and manure.  The final carcass washwater is relatively clean.  All
are discharged to the sewer.
                                  17

-------
A trend appears to be developing for skinning hogs.
This eliminates the scalding and dehairing.
much  like  cattle.
Next,   the  carcass  is  opened  by  hand  knives  and  the  animal  i s
eviscerated*  The heart, liver, tongue (cattle), and kidneys are  removed
from  the  viscera and washed; these are sold as edible meat or are used
in meat products.  Lungs may be sold for pet food.  The balance  of  the
viscera is channeled to the viscera handling subprocess.  The carcass is
also  trimmed and inspected.  Scrap trimmings go to rendering for edible
or inedible by-products.  Blood and tissue from  the  evisceration  find
their  way  directly  to  the sewer and are washed into the sewer during
clean-up.  The carcasses, cut in half for beef and hogs, and left  whole
for  sheep  and calves, are hung in a cooler where they stay at least 24
hours.   Materials recovered during clean-up, particularly by dry  clean-
up procedures, go to inedible rendering, either on- or off-site.


                            Blood Processing

Handling and processing of the blood is usually a part of the slaughter-
house  operation.   However, in some cases, the blood may be shipped out
of a plant for  processing  elsewhere.   The  blood  may  be  heated  to
coagulate  the  albumin; then the albumin and fibrin are separated (such
as with a screen or centrifuge) from the blood water and  forwarded  for
further  processing  into  such products as pharmaceutical preparations.
The blood water or serum remaining after coagulation may  be  evaporated
for  animal  feed, or it may be sewered.  In most cases, the whole blood
is sent directly to conventional blood dryers and used for animal feed.


                            Viscera Handling

The beef paunches may be handled either wet or dry.  For  wet  handling,
the contents of the paunches, 50 to 70 pounds of partially digested feed
("paunch  manure")  are  washed out with water and passed over a screen.
The separated solids go to solid waste  handling.   The  liquor  passing
through  the  screen  is  generally  sewered.   In  dry handling, paunch
contents are dumped on a screen  or  other  dewatering  device  and  the
solids  are  sent  either  to a dryer or to a truck for removal from the
plant.   In some plants, the entire paunch contents are  sewered;  solids
are  later  removed at the sewage treatment plant; it is common to scald
and bleach the paunches.  The paunch is then washed thoroughly if it  is
to  be  used for edible products.  Hog stomach contents are normally wet
processed.   A  newer  practice  is  to  send  the  entire  contents  to
processing or to haul out for disposal elsewhere.

The  intestines  may be sent directly to rendering or they may be hashed
and washed and then sent to rendering,  often, the beef paunches and hog
stomachs and the intestines are washed and saved  for  edible  products.
                                  18

-------
For  example, it is common practice to bleach the paunches for marketing
as tripe, and to recover hog casings and chitterlings  (large  intestines
of  hogs).   Occasionally,  paunches and stomachs are given only a brief
washing and are sold for food for mink or pet  food.   stomachs  may  be
routed,  unopened, directly to inedible rendering.  Hog intestines still
find some market as sausage  casings  and  for  surgical  sutures.   Any
viscera  washing  or  cleaning  operation  results  in  the  Contents of
stomachs, intestines, etc, as well as a considerable  amount  of  grease
being discharged to the sewer.


                            Hide Processing

Hides  may  be  processed  wet  or  dry.   Wet  processing involves hide
demanuring, washing, and defleshing, followed by a brine cure in a brine
vat or raceway.  The cure time may be as short  as  12  hours.   In  dry
curing,  the washed, defleshed hides are packed with salt and stacked in
the curing room.  Often hides are only salted and hauled to other plants
or to tanneries for washing, defleshing and curing.  Washing may be done
by batches in a rotating screen or in  a  tumbler  similar  to  a  large
concrete  mixer.  Defleshing is usually done by passing the hide through
rotating scraper knives.  In very small plants both may be done by hand.
Some effort is being  made  toward  transferring  some  of  the  tannery
operations  to  the  slaughtering plant; this allows better recovery and
ensuing wastes to be channeled into animal feed.   On  the  other  hand,
some specialty plants have come into being that take the green, unwashed
hides  from the slaughtering operation and deflesh, clean, and cure them
as an intermediate step before they go to the tannery.  Hide  processing
leads  to  significant  loads  of blood, tissue, and dirt being sewered.
The curing operation contributes salt (sodium  chloride)   to  the  waste
water.


                                Cutting

Although  meat  cutting  may  be  considered  part  of  the  "processing
operation", it is often carried out in a separate part of the  building,
or  may  be  carried  out  in plants that do no further processing.  The
latter is particularly true in the case of beef plants.  In the  cutting
area,  the carcasses are cut for direct marketing of smaller sections or
individual cuts, or for further processing in the processing operations.
Trimmings from this operation that  do  not  go  to  products,  such  as
sausages  and  canned meats, go to rendering of edible fats and tallows.
Inedible materials are rendered for inedible fats and solids.  There  is
always  some  material that reaches the floor, and a considerable amount
that adheres to saw blades or conveyer  systems,  including  meat,  bone
dust,  fat  tissues  and  blood  that  can  be  recovered  for  inedible
rendering.  Much of this, however, is washed to the sewer during  clean-
up.
                                  19

-------
                            Meat Processing

The  edible  portion  resulting  from  slaughtering  and  cutting may be
processed in a variety of ways.  These include the manufacture  of  many
varieties  of  sausages,  hams,  bacon,  canned  meats,  pickled  meats,
hamburger, portional cuts, etc.  Obviously,  the  processing  of  edible
products  is complex and varies from plant to plant-  Some beef cuts are
delivered to curing rooms for preparation of corned beef.  Hog carcasses
are cut up and hams, sides, and shoulders are generally sent to  curing.
Some loins may be deboned and cured for such products as Canadian bacon.
(Most  loins  are  packaged  without  curing  for the retail market.)  An
average of about 400 kg of edible "processed" products is obtained  from
the  processing  of  1000  kg  LWK in meat processing operations.  It is
recognized that this number can vary—it may be much higher in some  hog
operations,  but  when  edible rendered products such as lard, and fresh
pork products such as loins,  which  are  not  considered  as  processed
products,  are  excluded,  the  value is not unreasonable.  Further, the
value of 400 kg processed product  per  1000  kg  LWK   (or  a  ratio  of
processed  products  to   LWK   of  0.4)   forms a natural break point in
categorizing packinghouses—products to  LWK ratio of less than 0.4  are
low-processing packinghouses; high-processing packinghouses have a ratio
of at least 0.4.

The  curing  operation involves injecting a salt and sugar solution into
the meat, usually with a multineedle injection machine.  Some curing  is
done  by  soaking  in  cure solution.  Smoking is done in smokehouses at
elevated temperatures.  Smoked flavors are, also, obtained by soaking in
or injecting a solution containing "liquid smoke".  Spills from  cooking
equipment,  excess cure solution spilled during injection, and materials
washed into the sewer during clean-up all contribute to the waste load.

The processing operations may be carried out either in packing plants or
in separate plants that do processing only.  The "meat packing" industry
concerns only the processing associated with packing plants.


                               Rendering

Rendering separates fats and water from tissue.  Two types of rendering,
wet or dry, may be used for either edible or inedible products.  A  type
of  dry  rendering  process called "low temperature" rendering is coming
into common use, particularly for edible  rendering.   Edible  trimmings
from  the  cutting  operations  that  do  not  go  into products such as
sausages and canned meats go to rendering for preparation of edible fats
and tallows.  The inedible processing is carried out in an area  in  the
packing plant separate from the processing of edible products.  Inedible
products find use mainly in animal feed.
                                  20

-------
The materials to be rendered are normally passed through a grinder.  For
inedible   rendering,   this  includes  bones,  offal  (usually  without
cleaning), condemned animals, etc.  From there it is fed to a continuous
rendering  operation,  or  to  a  blow  tank  that  can  be  pressurized
periodically  to feed batch cookers.  Economics usually dictate the type
of process used.

Wet rendering is usually carried out in pressure tanks with 40 to 60 psi
steam added directly.  The fat phase is separated from the  water  phase
after  cooking.  The solids in the water phase are screened out, leaving
what is called tankwater.  Tankwater is frequently evaporated to a thick
protein-rich material kncwn as "stick", which is added to animal feeds.

Dry rendering is carried out either in vessels that are open  to  atmos-
pheric  pressure  or  are  closed  and  under a vacuum.  The material is
cooked until all of the free moisture in the tissue is driven off.   The
cooked  material  is  then  screened  to  remove  the fat from the solid
proteinaceous  residue.   Dry  rendering  can  be  either  a  batch   or
continuous   operation,   depending  upon  the  equipment  used.   Batch
operations are conducted in moderate-sized agitated vessels;  continuous
operations are conducted in either agitated vessels that are long enough
to  provide  sufficient  retention  time  to  evaporate the water, or in
multistage evaporators.  Dry batch rendering is  the  most  widely  used
rendering process.

Low  temperature rendering is a fairly recent development used primarily
to produce edible  products.   In  this  process,  the  material  to  be
rendered  is first finely ground.  The mass is then heated to just above
the melting point of the fat.  Centrifugation is used to remove the non-
fatty material, and the fat is further clarified in a second centrifuge.
The water phase may be further treated in other types of  equipment  for
grease and solids recovery.

Spills  from  cooking  equipment,  collection tanks, and discharges from
equipment  washdown  further  contribute  to  total  waste   discharges.
However,  rendering  operations  serve to recover a number of materials,
(e.g., grease, fats, offal tissue) which might, otherwise,  dramatically
increase  total  plant  waste  loads.   Moreover, since material such as
grease that is less  readily  biodegradable  is  reduced  in  raw  waste
discharges,  subsequent  efficiencies  in biological waste treatment are
enhanced.


                           Materials Recovery

The waste water from the plant, excluding only the waste water from  the
holding  pens and, perhaps, paunch screening, usually runs through catch
basins, grease traps, or flotation units.  The primary purpose of  these
systems  is  not  waste  treatment  per  se,  rather  the purpose is the
                                  21

-------
recovery of grease, which is sent to inedible rendering and represents a
valuable  by-product.   The  very  important  function  of  removal   of
pollutants  is,  also,  served.  Grease recovery most often has been the
controlling factor, so  the  systems  may  be  considered  part  of  the
manufacturing  operation  rather  than  a  stage in pollution abatement.
However, if the catch basin or grease trap is not adequate to  meet  the
final effluent requirement, it may be necessary to further remove grease
by  an  air  flotation  unit, with or without the addition of chemicals.
This unit functions as primary treatment although its main function   is
product recovery.

The  most  widely  used method of solids recovery employs a catch basin.
Solids  (grit, residual flesh) settle  to  the  bottom  and  are  removed
continuously  or  periodically;  grease floats to the top and is scraped
off, often continuously.  For effective recovery,  these  units  usually
have  greater  than  a  30-minute  detention  time  and  are designed to
minimize turbulence.

The best grease recovery is  accomplished  by  employing  dissolved  air
flotation  in  a tank.  The tanks are usually large enough to retain the
liquid for twenty minutes to one hour.  Air is injected into  a  portion
of  the  effluent,  pressurized,  and  recycled, or is injected into the
waste water before it enters the tank.  The  liquid  is  pressurized  to
"supersaturate"  it with air.  The liquid then enters the tank where air
bubbles coming out of solution rise  to  the  surface,  carrying  grease
particles  with  them.   The  grease  is removed by skimmers.  While the
tanks are not designed for the  most  effective  removal  of  settleable
solids,  some solids settle to the bottom and are scraped into a pit and
pumped out.
In addition to recovery systems above, some plants also recover part  of
the  settleable solids before the waste streams .enter the grease removal
system by employing self-cleaning screens, either static, vibrating,  or
rotating.   The  solids  that  are  recovered from these, as well as the
solids recovered from the catch basins are  sometimes  returned  to  the
plant's inedible rendering system.
                                  22

-------
                       PRQDyCT.IQ^_CLASSIFICATIQN

The  U.S.  Bureau of Census, Standard Industrial Classification Manual 4
classifies  the  meat  products  industry  under   Standard   Industrial
Classification   (SIC)  group  code  number  201  (Major Group 20).  Meat
packing plants are classified as Industry No. 2011, which is defined as:

         "Establishments primarily engaged in the slaughtering,
          for their own account or on a contract basis for the
           trade of cattle, hogs, sheep, lambs, and calves for
          meat to be sold or to be used on the same premises in
          canning and curing, and in making sausage, lard, and
                            other products."

    Abattoirs on own account or for the trade; except nonfood animals
    Bacon, slab and sliced, mitsc*
    Beef, mitsc
    Blood meal
    Canned meats, except baby foods, mitsc
    Cured meats, mitsc
    Lamb, mitsc
    Lard, mitsc
    Meat extracts, mitsc
    Meat, mitsc
    Meat packing plants
    Mutton, mitsc
    Pork, mitsc
    Sausages, mitsc
    slaughtering plants; except nonfood animals
    Variety meats  (fresh edible organs), mitsc
    Veal, mitsc

*mitsc - made in the same establishment as the basic materials.


                      ANTICIPATED INDUSTRY GROWTH

Shipments of meat slaughtering and meat processing plants  in  1972  was
$23.8  billion  and  is  expected  to rise by about six percent to about
$25,3 billion in 1973.  The U^S.^ Industrial^^Outlook;  1973,   estimates
that  this annual growth rate of six percent per year will be substained
through 1980 for American producers. 5

Factors that should contribute to growth can be distinguished from those
that act to restrain this growth.
                                  23

-------
A growing population and rising family incomes will continue to maintain
consumer demand for meat products.  Historically, as incomes of American
families have grown, they have substituted higher priced  food  products
such  as  meats  for  the bread and potatoes in their diets.  Demand for
beef, in particular, has continued to grow on a per capita basis as well
as in total; for example, in 1972  the  typical  American  consumed  115
pounds  of  beef,  which was two pounds more than in 1971.  In addition,
larger quantities of portion-controlled meats  are  being  processed  in
response   to   institutional  demands  by  fast-food  outlets,  hotels,
restaurants, and other institutions.

Several factors serve to restrain potential growth of the American  meat
industry,  including  higher  meat prices, removal of import quotas, and
the availability of synthetic (soybean protein)  substitutes.    Factors
in  higher  meat prices may be sharply reduced hog and calf slaughter in
1972, for an overall decrease of more  than  three  percent  from  1971.
Supplies  must  increase  sharply  during the remainder of the decade to
achieve the projected growth rates.  Although firms in the industry have
installed new plants and equipment, the resulting  increased  efficiency
has  been  more  than  offset  by  higher  costs  for  labor, livestock,
packaging materials, and transportation—costs that have been passed  on
to consumers in the form of higher retail prices.  On the other hand, it
is  expected  that new plants will be built to replace those that become
obsolete and are no longer economically feasible to operate.  Also,  new
plants  will  be needed to satisfy an overall growing demand for meat as
the population and faimily incomes  increase.   The  trend  is  for  new
plants  to be larger and perhaps more specialized  (such as large beef or
pork slaughterhouses) and to be located near the  animal  supply.   This
means  that  plants  will  continue  to move away from the consumer  (the
large city) to the more rural  areas  where  the  large  feed  lots  are
located.

-------
                               SECTION IV

                        INDUSTRY CATEGORIZATION
                             CATEGORIZATION

In  developing  effluent limitations guidelines and standards of perfor-
mance for the meat packing industry, a judgment was made as  to  whether
limitations  and  standards are appropriate for different segments  (sub-
categories) within the industry.  To identify  any  such  subcategories,
the following factors were considered:

    o    Waste Water characteristics and treatability
    o    Final products
    o    Primary manufacturing processes
    o    Secondary manufacturing processes
    o    Raw materials
    o    Size, age, and location of production facilities.

After  considering  all of these factors, it was concluded that the meat
packing industry consists of  two  major  groups:   slaughterhouses  and
packinghouses which are defined below.

         A slaughterhouse is a plant that slaughters animals and has
         as its main product fresh meat as whole, half of quarter
         carcasses or smaller meat cuts.

         A packinghouse is a plant that both slaughters and processes
         fresh meat to cured, smoked, canned, and other prepared meat
         products. *

Each  of  the  above  groups  was  further subdivided into two segments,
giving a total of four subcategories:

    I.   Simple Slaughterhouse—is defined as a slaughterhouse that
         does a very limited by-product processing, if any,
         usually no more than two of such operations as rendering,
         paunch and viscera handling, blood processing, or hide or
         hair processing,

   II.   complex Slaughterhouse—is defined as a slaughterhouse that
         does extensive by-product processing, usually at least three
                                  25

-------
  Ill
   IV,
of such operations as rendering, paunch and viscera handling
blood processing, or hide or hair processing,

Low-Processing Packinghouse—is defined as a packinghouse
that processes no more than the total animals killed at that
plant, normally processing less than the total kill.

High-Processing Packinghouse—is defined as a packinghouse
that processes both animals slaughtered at the site
and additional carcasses from outside sources.
*Processed meat products are limited to:  chopped beef, meat stew,
canned meats, bacon, hams  (boneless, picnic, water added)f franks,
wieners, bologna, hamburger, luncheon meat loaves, sausages.

The differences between the four  subcategories  and  the  relationships
between  them is shown schematically in Figure 4,  The simplest plant is
a simple Slaughterhouse,  and  it  does  little  secondary   (by-product)
processing.   By  adding  substantial  secondary  processing,  the plant
becomes  a  Complex  Slaughterhouse.   By  adding  a   meat   processing
operation, but processing less than produced in the plant as fresh meat,
(processing  less  than  the  plant  kills),  the  plant  becomes  a Low
Processing Packinghouse.  When the plant processes more  than  it  kills
(e.g.,  brings  in  carcasses from outside in addition to processing its
own) ,  it  becomes  a  High  Processing  Packinghouse.   The  degree  of
secondary processing conducted at any packinghouse is somewhat variable,
although  a large number of by-product recovery operations are typically
practiced.  The basic slaughter capacity of a plant was not an  adequate
criterion  for  categorization*   However,  there  is a tendency for the
smaller capacity slaughterhouses to  do  little  by-product  processing,
thus  to  fall  in  the  simple  slaughterhouse  subcategory.  The large
capacity slaughterhouses, on the other hand tend to do  more  by-product
processing, thereby falling in the complex subcategory.  These slaughter
capacity tendencies are reflected in the kill averages for each of these
subcategories, as indicated in Section V.

The packinghouses slaughter animals and prepare processed meat products.
Those  plants  in  the  low processing subcategory tended to have larger
slaughter  capacities  but  produce  a  smaller  quantity  of  processed
products in comparison with the high processing packinghouses.

The  normalized waste water flow (liters per 1000 kg LWK) increases with
kill rate.  It also increases with  increased  production  of  processed
meat  products,  and  apparently  at  a  faster  rate than for slaughter
operations alone.  Thus, the normalized waste water flow increases  from
simple  slaughterhouses  to  complex  slaughterhouse  to  low-processing
packinghouses; finally, to the maximum in high-processing packinghouses,,
As indicated in other sections of this report, the wasteload for  plants
                                  26

-------
in   any  given  subcategory,  which  includes  most  of  the  pollution
parameters described in Section VI, increases with increased total water
consumption.  Therefore, even though raw  waste  loads  differ  somewhat
(particularly    for    complex   slaughterhouses   and   low-processing
packinghouses where the latter has higher flowrates but lower raw  waste
loads)  the  larger  waste  load reported in Section V for subcategories
with greater water consumption is as expected.


                      J&gIONALE_FOR_gATEGOKE.2ATION

             Waste Water Characteristics and Treatability

Industrial practices within the meat packing industry  are  diverse  and
produce  variable  waste  loads.   It is possible to develop a rationale
division of the industry, however, on the basis of factors  which  group
plants   with  similar  raw  waste  characteristics.   The  waste  water
characteristic used in categorizing the industry is five-day biochemical
oxygen demand (BOD5)  in units per 1000  units  live  weight  killed:  kg
BOD5/1000  kg LWK  (Ib BOD5/1000 LWK) .  BOD5 provides the best measure of
plant  operation  and  treatment  effectiveness  among  the   parameters
measured,  and  more  data  are  available than for all other parameters
except suspended solids.  Suspended solids data  serve  to  substantiate
the conclusions developed from BODS in categorizing the industry.

The  major plant waste load is organic and biodegradable: BODS, which is
a measure of biodegradability, is the best measure of the load  entering
the  waste  stream from the plant.  Furthermore, because secondary waste
treatment is a biological process, BODS, provides a  useful  measure  of
the  treatability  of  the  waste and the effectiveness of the treatment
process.  Chemical oxygen demand  (COD)  measures  total  organic  content
and some inorganic content.  COD is a good indicator of change, but does
not  relate  directly  to biodegradation, and thus does not indicate the
demand on a biological treatment process or on a stream.

As developed in more detail in Section V, specific differences exist  in
the  BODS  load  for  raw  wastes  for  four  distinct groupings of meat
products operations.   As defined above, these groupings (by plant  type)
are substantiated as subcategories on the basis of waste load.

A  number  of  additional  parameters were also considered.  Among these
were nitrites and nitrates, Kjeldahl nitrogen, ammonia, total  dissolved
solids, and phosphorus.  In each case,  data were insufficient to justify
categorizing  on  the  basis  of  the specified parameters; on the other
hand, the data on these parameters helped to verify judgments based upon
BODS.
                                  27

-------
                                        Meat  Packing Industry
                          i
                                                  1
                   Slaughterhouses
                                        Packinghouses
        Subcategory  1

            SIMPLE
      SLAUGHTERHOUSE
00
                                    1
  Subcategory 2

    COMPLEX
SLAUGHTERHOUSE
           Slaughter
          Operations
          Low-Level
          Secondary
          Processing
     Slaughter
    Operations
                                     I
     Intensive
    Secondary
    Processing
  Subcategory  3

LOW-PROCESSING
  PACKINGHOUSE
    Slaughter
    Operations
     Intensive
    Secondary
    Processing
                                                           Low-Level
                                                          Processed Meat
                                                            Products
                                                           Production
Subcategory 4
HIGH-PROCESSING
PACKINGHOUSE



Slaughter
Operations


Intensive
Secondary
Processing


Additional
Carcass and
Meat-Cut
Purchases

.
Intensive
Processed
Meat Products
Production

                          Figure 4.  Categorization of Meat Packing Plants

-------
Judging from secondary waste treatment effectiveness and final  effluent
limits;  waste  waters from all plants contain the same constituents and
are amenable to the same kinds of biological treatment concepts.  It was
anticipated that geographical location, and hence climate, might  affect
the  treatability of the waste tp some Degree.  Climate has occasionally
influenced the kind of secondary waste treatment used, but has  not  had
an  influence on the ultimate treatability of the waste or the treatment
effectiveness, given careful operation and maintenance.


                             Final Products

The final products of a meat packing plant provide further  support  for
the  selected  subcategorization.   Final  products  relate  directly to
processes employed, as discussed below.  A plant that processes meat  to
products  such  as  canned,  smoked,  and  cured  meats is significantly
different from a plant that does no processing.  Thus, there is a  clear
distinction  between  a  packinghouse-^  plant that both slaughters and
processes—and a slaughterhouse,

Because of product differences, a further division of  packinghouses  is
justified;  some  plants  process  no  more  than  they kill, and others
process far more by bringing in additional carcasses and meat cuts  from
other  plants.   Therefore, packinghouses divide into two subcategories,
depending on the amount of final product that they produce.

         Low-Processing Packinghouse—has a ratio of weight of pro-
         cessed products to live weight killed less than 0.4.  This
         numerical designation actually approximates the ratio of
         weight for beef animals, when the entire
         carcass is processed (i.e., forty percent of the weight of
         a live animal ultimately is processed into final products).
         For purely hog operations this ratio may reach 0.55 or higher due
         to efficiencies in carcass utilization.
         However, excluding rendered products results in an
         average situation where the ratio 0.4 appears reasonable.
         It is noteworthy that in practice, these plants have
         an average ratio not of 0.4, but about 0.14.  This low
         ratio indicates that, on the average, low processing
         plants process only about a thirjd of their kill.

         High-Processing Packinghouse—ha|s a ratio of weight of pro-
         cessing products to live weight killed greater than 0.4.  From
         the earlier definition, such a plant must bring in carcasses
         from outside sources for processing.  For these types of
         plants the average ratio is about 0.65—high processing
         plants, on the average, process about one-third more carcasses
         than animals killed at the site.
                                  29

-------
The inedible by-products of a meat packing plant  (i.e.,  tallow,  dried
blood,  tankage, dried solids) also affect categorization.  However, the
methods of by-product  manufacture  vary  greatly,  and  the  effect  of
recovered  by-products  upon  categorization  is discussed in "Secondary
Manufacturing Processes".


                    Primary Manufacturing Processes

The primary manufacturing processes include the storage and slaughtering
of animals and the dressing (evisceration), cutting, and  processing  of
carcasses.   As diagrammed in Section III, Figure 1, there is a distinct
difference between the types and amounts of primary processes in various
plants.  Together with final products, this factor enhances the logic of
the chosen subcategories.


                   Secondary Manufacturing Processes

Secondary manufacturing processes are those  by-product  operations  for
the handling, recovery, and processing of blood, trimmings, and inedible
offal.  This includes paunch and viscera handling, hide processing, hair
recovery  and  processing, and edible and inedible rendering.  Secondary
processes used interrelate  with  both  the  final  products  and  waste
characteristics;  however,  the  kind  of  manufacturing process is more
relevant than the specific by-product.   The  process  by  which  a  by-
product  is  made  determines the waste load.  Thus, it is the nature of
the secondary processes rather than by-products themselves which  define
the   categories.   Unfortunately,  there  are  a  number  of  secondary
manufacturing processes that can be used within  each  by-product  area.
Furthermore,  there  is  no  typical  or  usual combination of secondary
manufacturing processes in the industry.  Therefore, some other means of
grouping plants by secondary manufacturing processes is required.

Computer analysis, literature, and experience indicated  that  empirical
weighting  factors   (relative  contributions to waste loads) assigned to
each secondary processing technique would permit a further  analysis  of
the  slaughterhouse subcategory wherein the types and amounts of second-
ary processes prove critical.

Therefore, waste loads in terms of kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK  (Ib BOD5/1000  Ib
LWK)   were  estimated  for  each  secondary  process  that  contributes
materially to the raw waste load.  Estimates were made from  discussions
with  consultants,  data obtained in this study, and from the experience
of the investigators.  &s summarized in the subcategory definitions  and
waste  characteristics  sections above, the waste load factors should be
considered relative to each other rather than  as  absolute  waste  load
values.  The factors applied to the secondary processes were:
                                  30

-------
         Process
Factor
Paunch handling:
     wet dumping
     dry dumping

Blood processing:
     Steam coagulated and screened or
     centrifuged, with blcod water sewered
     whole blood dried

Rendering (edible or inedible)
     wet and low temperature,
     sewering water
     Dry

Hide processing
     Defleshing, washing, curing

Hair processing
     Hydrolyzing
     Washing

Viscera Handling
     Casing saving, hashing and washing,
     or stomach and chitterling washing
     Tripe processing
 1.0
 0.1
 1.2
 0.3
 2.0
 0.5
 1.5
 1.0
 0.7
 0.6
 0.4
The  waste load factors for the secondary processes were summed for each
slaughterhouse.   The  sum  of  the  waste  load  factors  divided   the
slaughterhouse   sample   into  two  distinct  clusters,  one  group  of
slaughterhouses with totals below 4.0 and  the  other  above  4.0.   The
plants  with totals below 4.0 were relatively simple; i.e., they had few
secondary processes and those processes tended to be the types that were
low  waste  load  contributors.   These  "simple"  slaughterhouses   had
relatively  low  total  waste loads.  The plants with waste load factors
above 4.0  were  much  more  complex;  i.e.,  they  had  many  secondary
processes.   These "complex" slaughterhouses had distinctly higher waste
loads.

The waste load factors serve an  additional  purpose.   Occasionally,  a
plant  in one of the subcategories will conduct an unusually high amount
of secondary  processing  as  an  example,  one  complex  slaughterhouse
currently processes hides from several other plants.  Its raw waste load
is  unusually  high.   However, when a waste load of 1.5 kg BOD5/1000 kg
LWK (1.5 Ib BOD5/1000 Ib LWK, or about 1.5 Ib BODS per  hide  processed)
is  taken  into  account  for the extra hides processed, the total waste
load for the plant can be explained and  the  relation  of  other  waste
sources to those from the hide processing is established.
                                  31

-------
                             Raw Materials

paw  materials  characteristics  help to  substantiate the above  categor-
ization.  The raw materials include live  animals  (cattle,   hogs,   sheep,
lambs,  and  calves),  water,  chemicals,  and fuel.  Although different
kinds of animals vary greatly in size and require   some  different  pro-
cessing techniques, these effects are best handled  by incorporation  into
other  factors.   For  example,  weight   variations are accounted  for  by
normalizing (dividing) waste parameter values by the daily   live  weight
killed;  this gives a waste load per unit of raw material independent  of
the kind of animal.  Plant process options or alternatives  are dependent
on  the  kind  of  animal,  mainly  in    by-product  processing.    The
consideration of these process options in categorization is described  in
the  section  above  on secondary manufacturing processes.   The  industry
subcategories have the following distribution of animal type slaughtered
which  clearly   shows   a   difference   between   slaughterhouse  and
packinghouse,  but  which  alsb reveals no significant difference  within
either  of  these  two   groups, •  thus   further   substantiating  the
categori zation.

A  definite relationship was found between raw waste load and water  use,
both in individual plants and in the four subcategories.  Variations  in
water  flow  between  subcategories  are  caused  by  different  process
requirements.  Highly varying  water  use in  plants  within the  same
subcategory are the result of varying operating practices.
Animal
Type
Beef,
only
Hogs,
only
Beef &
hogs &
Other
Total
Simple
, Slaughterhouse
52.6
26.3
21.1
100.0
Complex
Slaughterhouse
61.1
27.8
11.1
100,0
Low-Processing
Packinghouse
14.8
25.9
59.3
100.0
High- Processing
Packinghouse
9.1
40.8
50.1
100.0
Total
31.4
30.2
38.4
100.0
         Table 1A.  Estimates of  the Distribution of Primary Raw Materials
                   by Subcategory
                                   32

-------
Chemicals used in packing plants  (i.e., preservatives, cure, pickle, and
detergents)  do not  serve as a basis  for categorization.  Differences in
waste  loads  caused by chemicals are the result  of   different  operating
practices.

Fuels  are   usually  natural  gas  or fuel oil.  They have no effect on
categorization.


                        Size, Age, and Location

Size, .age, and location are not meaningful factors for categorization of
the  industry.  Neither the information from, this study,  nor  that  from
previous  studies,   reveals  any  discernible relationship between plant
size and effluent quality or other basis for  categorizing.   Both  high
and  low  quality  raw  wastes were found at both ends of the plant size
spectrum, within the  industry.  The very small plants may use a table  or
,bed  instead of a rail to support the animal carcass in the slaughtering
operations.  This practice has no known effect on  the  raw  waste  load
from  small  plants,  relative  to  categorization,  but  it may greatly
facilitate waste disposal  for  these plants.   other  factors  perhaps
related  to  plant   size,  such  as   degree  of by-product recovery, are
discussed elsewhere.

Age  as a factor for  categorization might be  expected  to  be  at  least
amenable   to   quantitative   identification  and   interpretation,  but
unfortunately age does not even achieve that degree  of usefulness.   The
meat   packing industry is a relatively old industry, and some old plants
incorporate  early operating ideas and practices.  Some  plants,  on  the
other  hand, are very new and incorporate the latest operating ideas and
practices.   Nevertheless, most older  plants have been updated by changes
in plant processes and plant structure.  Therefore,  to say that a  plant
was  built   50  years  ago  and  is   50  years  old  is not particularly
meaningful in terms  of interpreting in-plant practices.  In fact, within
the  study sample the two plants with  the lowest waste load  differed  in
age  by  about  5C   years.   Consequently, no consistent pattern between
plant  age and raw waste characteristics was found.

Examination  of the raw waste characteristics relative to plant  location
reveals  no  apparent relationship or pattern.  The  effect of manure and
mud-coated animals processed in the winter by northern  plants  was  not
found  to be  significant.  The type of animal handled, which is sometimes
influenced   by location, does not seem to affect the waste load or other
measure of categorization.        .                                  '
                                  33

-------
effluents are so dilute that concentration becomes limiting.   In  these
cases,  concentration  is expressed as milligrams per liter, mg/1.  Kill
and amount of processed meat products are expressed in thousands of kg.


Using information from the sources and methods outlined in Section  III,
the  following  Tables  2  through  5  include a summary of data showing
averages,  standard  deviations,  ranges,  and  number  of  observations
(plants)   is  presented  in  the following sections for each of the four
subcategories of the industry.
                                                                    i

                            Slaughterhouses

A typical flow diagram illustrating the sources of waste waters in  both
simple  and  complex slaughterhouses is shown in Figure 5.  It should be
noted that a simple slaughterhouse normally conducts very few of the by-
product operations  (secondary processes)  listed in Figure 5,  whereas  a
complex  slaughterhouse  conducts  most  or  all  of them.  Occasionally
slaughterhouses may not have waste waters from some  of  the  operations
shown, depending upon individual plant circumstances.  For example, some
slaughterhouses  have dry animal pen clean-up with no discharge of waste
water, some have little or no cutting, and other  may  have  a  separate
sewer for sanitary waste.

The  flow  diagrams  include  both beef and hog operations.  As noted in
Section IV, no distinction was made in subcategories  for  the  type  of
animal.  It is recognized, however, that in some small plants there will
be more significant differences in pollution wasteloads depending on the
animal  type.   These  cases,  however,  are still within the wasteloads
cited for the subcategory.
Table 2 summarizes the plant and raw waste characteristics for a  simple
slaughterhouse.   The table shows that 24 of the 85 plants analyzed were
simple slaughterhouses (about one-half were beef and the others  divided
between  hogs and mixed kill) and that the BODS wasteload covers a range
from 1,5 to 14.3  kg/lCOO  kg  LWK  (same  value  in  lb/1000  lb1 LWK).
Defining small plants as those with a LWK of less than 43,130 kg  (95,000
Ibs),  and  medium  plants  as  those  with  a LWK between 43,130 kg and
344,132 kg  (758,000 lb), it can be stated that  only  small  and  medium
plants were included.  In fact, two are small and twenty-two are medium.
                                  36

-------
Chemicals used in packing plants (i.e., preservatives, cure, pickle, and
detergents)   do not serve as a basis for categorization.  Differences in
waste loads caused by chemicals are the result  of  different  operating
practices.
Fuels  are  usually
categorization.
natural  gas  or  fuel oil.  They have no effect on
                        Size, Age, and Location

Size, :age, and location are not meaningful factors for categorization of
the industry.  Neither the information from, this study,  nor  that  from
previous  studies,  reveals  any  discernible relationship between plant
size and effluent quality or other basis for  categorizing.   Both  high
and  low  quality  raw  wastes were found at both ends of the plant size
spectrum, within the industry.  The very small plants may use a table  or
bed  instead of a rail to support the animal carcass in the slaughtering
operations.  This practice has no known effect on  the  raw  waste  load
from  small  plants,  relative  to  categorization,  but  it may greatly
facilitate waste disposal  for  these  plants.   Other  factors  perhaps
related  to  plant  size,  such  as  degree  of by-product recovery, are
discussed elsewhere.

Age as a factor for categorization might be  expected  to  be  at  least
amenable   to   quantitative   identification  and  interpretation,  but
unfortunately age does not even achieve that degree of usefulness.   The
meat  packing industry is a relatively old industry, and some old plants
incorporate early operating ideas and practices.  Some  plants,  on  the
other  hand, are very new and incorporate the latest operating ideas and
practices.  Nevertheless, most older plants have been updated by changes
in plant processes and plant structure.  Therefore, to say that a  plant
was  built  50  years  ago  and  is  50  years  old  is not particularly
meaningful in terms of interpreting in-plant practices.  In fact, within
the study sample the two plants with the lowest waste load  differed  in
age  by  about  5C  years.   Consequently, no consistent pattern between
plant age and raw waste characteristics was found.

Examination of the raw waste characteristics relative to plant  location
reveals  no  apparent relationship or pattern.  The effect of manure and
mud-coated animals processed in the winter by northern  plants  was  not
found to be significant.  The type of animal handled, which is sometimes
influenced  by location, does not seem to affect the waste load or other
measure of categorization.
                                  33

-------

-------
                               SECTION V

                  WATER USE AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION

                      WASTE WATER CHARACTERISTICS


Water is a raw material in the meat packing industry  that  is  used  to
cleanse  products  and  to  remove  and  convey  unwanted material*  The
principal operations and processes in meat packing  plants  where  waste
water originates are;

    o    Animal holding pens

    o    Slaughtering

    o    Cutting

    o    Meat processing

    o    secondary manufacturing (by-product operations)
         including both edible and inedible rendering

    o    Clean-up

Waste  waters  from  slaughterhouses  and  packinghouses contain organic
matter (including grease), suspended  solids,  and  inorganic  materials
such as phosphates, nitrates, nitrites, and salt.  These materials enter
the  waste stream as blood, meat and fatty tissue, meat extracts, paunch
contents, bedding, manure, hair, dirt, contaminated cooling water losses
from edible and  inedible  rendering,  curing  and  pickling  solutions,
preservatives, and caustic or alkaline detergents.


                       Raw Waste Characteristics

The  raw  wasteload  from  all  four  subc^tegories  of the meat packing
industry discussed in the following paragraphs includes the  effects  of
in-plant  materials  recovery  which incidentally serves the function of
primary waste treatment.

The parameters used to characterize the  raw  effluent  were  the  flow,
BODS, suspended solids  (SS), grease, chlorides, phosphorus, and Kjeldahl
nitrogen.   As  discussed  in  Section  VI, BOD5 is considered to be, in
general, the best available measure of the wasteload.    Parameters  used
to  characterize  the size of the operations were the kill  (live weight)
and amount of processed meat products produced.   All  values  of  waste
parameters are expressed as kg/1000 kg LWK, which has the same numerical
value  when  expressed  in  lb/1000  Ib  LWK.   In  some  cases, treated
                                  35

-------
effluents are so dilute that concentration becomes limiting.   In  these
cases,  concentration  is expressed as milligrams per liter, mg/1.  Kill
and amount of processed meat products are expressed in thousands of kg.


using information from the sources and methods outlined in Section  III,
the  following  Tables  2  through  5  include a summary of data showing
averages,  standard  deviations,  ranges,  and  number  of  observations
(plants)   is  presented  in  the following sections for each of the four
subcategories of the industry.
                                                                    i

                            Slaughterhouses

A typical flow diagram illustrating the sources of waste waters in  both
simple  and  complex slaughterhouses is shown in Figure 5.  It should be
noted that a simple slaughterhouse normally conducts very few of the by-
product operations  (secondary processes) listed in Figure 5,  whereas  a
complex  slaughterhouse  conducts  most  or  all  of them.  Occasionally
slaughterhouses may not have waste waters from some  of  the  operations
shown, depending upon individual plant circumstances.  For example, some
slaughterhouses  have dry animal pen clean-up with no discharge of waste
water, some have little or no cutting, and other  may  have  a  separate
sewer for sanitary waste.

The  flow  diagrams  include  both beef and hog operations.  As noted in
Section IV, no distinction was made in subcategories  for  the  type  of
animal.  It is recognized, however, that in some small plants there will
be more significant differences in pollution wasteloads depending on the
animal  type.   These  cases,  however,  are still within the wasteloads
cited for the subcategory.


Simple Slaughterhouses

Table 2 summarizes the plant and raw waste characteristics for a  simple
slaughterhouse.   The table shows that 24 of the 85 plants analyzed were
simple slaughterhouses (about one-half were beef and the others  divided
between  hogs and mixed kill) and that the BODS wasteload covers a range
from 1.5 to 14.3  kg/lCOO  kg  LWK  (same  value  in  lb/1000  Ifo  IWK).
Defining small plants as those with a LWK of less than 43,130 kg  (95,000
Ibs),  and  medium  plants  as  those  with  a LWK between 43,130 kg and
344,132 kg  (758,000 lb), it can be stated that  only  small  and  medium
plants were included.  In fact, two are small and twenty-two are medium.
                                  36

-------
 Raw
Water
          Animal Pens
         Slaughtering
             Kill
         Hide Removal
         Evisceration
            Paunch
        Scalding & Hair
            Removal
                           Screening
            Cutting
      By-Product Operations
             Blood
             Hides
             Hair
             Tripe
           Rendering
            Casing
            S aving
                                                Materials
                       Recovery
  (except hair & hides)


            Ancillary Operations
                                 Sanitary Facilities
                                          Raw Wastewater
                                             from
                                          Slaughterhouse
              Figure 5.
Operating and Wastewater Flow Chart
 for Simple and Complex Slaughterhouses
        37

-------
Complex .Slaughterhouses

Table  3  summarizes the plant and raw waste characteristics for complex
slaughterhouses.  Nineteen  of  the  85  plants  analyzed  were  complex
slaughterhouses (11 were beef; 6, hogs; and 2, mixed).  Defining a large
plant  as  one with a LWK of greater than 344,132 kg  (758,000 Ib)r and a
medium plant as in the paragraph above, the kill data of Table  3  shows
all  complex  slaughterhouses  included  are  either  medium  or  large.
Actually about one-third were large.


                             Packinghouses.

A typical flow diagram illustrating the sources of waste waters in  both
low- and high-processing packinghouses is shown in Figure 6.  As defined
in  section  IV,  the main difference between a low- and high-processing
packinghouse is the amount of processed products relative to kill; i.e.,
a ratio of less than 0,4 for a low- and greater than  0.4  for  a  high-
processing   plant.   As  a  result,  the  wasteload  contribution  from
processing is less for a low-processing packinghouse.  A  comparison  of
Figures  5  and 6 shows that a packinghouse has the same basic processes
and operations contributing to the wasteload as a  slaughterhouse,  with
the  addition  of  the  meat  processing  for the packinghouse.  Another
difference is that the degree and amount of cutting is much greater  for
a  packinghouse.  In some cases, unfinished products may be shipped from
one plant to another for processing, resulting in more products produced
at a plant than live weight killed.

Low-Processing Packinghouses

Table 4 summarizes the plant and  raw  waste  characteristics  for  low-
processing  packinghouses.   Twenty-three of the 85 plants analyzed were
low-processing packinghouses.  The average ratio of  processed  products
to  kill  in these 23 plants is 0.14, with a standard deviation of 0.09.
The low-processing packinghouses included in the analyses have  a  ratio
of  processed  products  to  LWK  well  below  the  value of 0.4 used to
distinguish between low- and high-processing plants.   Using  the  above
definitions   of   plant   size,  the  kill  data  shows  that  all  the
packinghouses in the sample are medium or large in size.
                                  38

-------
               Table 2.  Summary of plant and Raw Waste Characteristics for Simple Slaughterhouses

Base
(Number of Plants)
Average
Standard Deviation
Range, low-high
Flow
1/1000 kg
LWK
(24)
5,328
3,644
1,334-
14,641
Kill
1000 kg /day
(24) ,
220
135
18.5-
552.
BOD
kg/ 1000 _kg
LWK
(24)
6.0 -
3.0 s
1.5-
14.3
Suspended
Solids
kg/ 10 00 kg
LWK
(22)
5.6
3.1
0.6-
12.9
Grease
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(12)
2.1
2.2.
0.24-
7.0
Kj eldahl
Nitrogen
as ff
kg/ 10 00 kg
LWK
(5)
0.68
0.46
0.23-
1.36
Chlorides
as Cl
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(3)
2.6
2.7
0.01-
5.4
Total
Phosphorus
as P
kg /1 000 kg
LWK
(5)
0.05
0.03
0. 014-
0.086
U)
              Table  3.   Summary  of  Plant  and Raw Waste Characteristics  for  Complex Slaughterhouses
Base
(Number of Plants)
Average
Standard Deviation
Range , low-high
Flow
1/1000 kg
LWK
(19)
7,379
2,718
3,627-
12,507
Kill
1000 kg /day
(19)
595
356
154-
1498
BOD
kg/ 10 00 kg
LWK
(19)
10.9
4.5
5,4
18,8
Suspended
Solids
kg/1000 kg
LWK
(16)
9.6
4.1
2.8-
20.5
Grease
kg/ 10 00 kg
LWK
(ID
5.9
5.7
0.7-
16.8
Kj eldahl
Nitrogen
as N
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(12)
0.84
0.66
0.13-
2.1
Chlorides
as Cl
kg/ 10 00 kg
LWK
(6)
2.8
2.7
0.81-
7.9
Total
Phosphorus
as P
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(5)
0.33
0.49
0.05-
1.2

-------
         Grinding  Cooking
         Curing   Canning
         Pickling  Slicing
         Smoking  Packaging
                                                          Raw Wastewater
                                                            from
                                                          Packinghouse
Figure 6.  Operating  and Wastewater  Flow  Chart
            for Low- and High-Processing Packinghouses
                            40

-------
High-Processing Packinghouses

Table 5 summarizes the plant and  raw  waste  characteristics  of  high-
processing packinghouses.  Nineteen of the 85 plants analyzed were high-
processing  packinghouses.  The range of data for the 19 plants is large
for all wasteload parameters.  The range of 0.4 to 2.14 for the ratio of
processed products to LWK suggests that much of the wasteload variations
caused by the wide variation in processing,  relative  to  kill.   Plant
size  as  measured  by  kill ranges from small to large; two plants were
small, 11 medium, and 6 large.


                        Discussion of Raw Wastes

The data in Tables 2 through 5 cover a waste water flow range of 1334 to
20,261 1/1000 kg LWK (160 to 2427 gal/1000 Ib LWK); a wasteload range of
1.5 to 30.5 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK (1.5 to 30.5 lb/1000 Ib LWK); and a kill
range of 18.5 to 1498 kkg LWK/day  (40  to  3300  thousand  Ib/day).   A
comparison  of  the  data  from  Tables  2  and 3 for simple and complex
slaughterhouses shows that the averages of all the waste parameters  are
higher for a complex plant.  This was expected because, by the method of
categorization  of  slaughterhouses,   complex  slaughterhouses conducted
more secondary (by-product) processes.

The data listed in Tables 4 and 5 for low- and high-processing  packing-
houses  show that high-processing plants have much higher average values
for all waste parameters on a LWK basis.

some variations in waste water flow and strength within any one  of  the
four  subcategories  can  be attributed to differences in the amount and
types of operations beyond slaughtering, such as by-product and prepared
meat processing, and the effectiveness of material recovery  in  primary
in-plant  treatment.   However,  the  major causes of flow and wasteload
variations are variations in water use and in housekeeping practices.

Excess water use removes body  fluids  and  tissues  from  products  and
conveys  them  into  the waste water.  The effect of waste water flow on
wasteload is discussed in more detail later in this Section.

In all four subcategories, statistical correlation analysis of the  data
revealed that the raw BODS wasteload correlates very well with suspended
solids,  with  grease,   and with Kjeldahl nitrogen on a LWK basis.  This
means that an increase (decrease)  in one parameter will  account  for  a
certain predictable increase  (decrease)  in another of the parameters.

The  effect  of  plant  size  (kill)  on wasteload as measured by BODS for
each category was assessed by  a  regression  analysis  as  outlined  in
Section  III.   The  results  showed  that  larger  plants  tend to have
slightly higher pollutional wasteloads.   This trend  is  not  caused  by
                                  41

-------
differences  in  processing.  Rather, it results from some of the plants
operating at ever increasing throughput, often beyond the LWK for  which
the  plant  was  designed.   Under these circumstances, housekeeping and
water management practices tend to become careless.  As a  result,  line
speed-up overloads fixed operations such as inedible rendering and blood
handling with consequent increases in raw waste loads.

Only  four  small  plants were included in the analysis; two were simple
slaughterhouses and two were high-processing  packinghouses.   Three  of
the  four  were substantially below the average BOD5 wasteload for their
subcateogry, suggesting that small plants can meet  effluent  limits  of
larger  plants.  The only other information available on small plants is
that of Macon and Cote. *  Accurate waste  data  were  obtained  on  ten
small packinghouses in 1961.  Because there was insufficient information
on  these  plants  to  subcategorize  them  as  low-  or high-processing
packinghouses, and the plants were not identified, the results were  not
used  in  determining  wasteloads  for the various subcategories.  Those
plants that practiced blood recovery had BODS wasteloads between 2.7 and
8.3  kg/1000  kg  LWK;  the  other  plants  which  sewered   blood   had
considerably  higher  waste  loads.   Although  some of the data did not
include the waste load from clean-up, Macon determined that the clean-up
could add from 0.35 to 3.0 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK.  These results  indicate
that  the  waste  load  from  small  packinghouses not sewering blood is
slightly less  than  those  from  larger  packinghouses.   This  further
substantiates that standards set for medium and large plants can be met,
without  special  hardship,  by  a  small  plant,  if the small plant is
properly equipped for blood disposal, paunch handling, and similar  high
waste-related operations.

Data in Tables 2 through 5 show that chlorides and phosphorus values are
less frequently measured than are values for the other parameters.  From
the  data  reported,  however, chlorides and phosphorus are dependent on
in-plant operations and  housekeeping  practices.   For  example,  large
amounts  of  chlorides  contained  in pickling solutions and used in the
processing of ham, bacon, and other cured products ultimately end up  in
the  waste waters.  This explains the unusually high chloride values for
high-processing packinghouses, i.e., four to six times  the  values  for
the  other subcategories, where relatively large amounts of products are
cured.

Very little  useful  information  on  other  waste  parameters  such  as
Kjeldahl  nitrogen,  nitrites,  nitrates/  ammonia,  and total dissolved
solids were reported by the 85 plants  whose  data  were  summarized  by
subcategory  in  this  section.   However/  some  information  on  these
parameters was obtained from other sources 7 and from field verification
studies conducted

-------
                             Table 4.   Summary of Plant  and Raw Waste Characteristics
                                       for Low-Processing Packinghouses
Base
(Dumber of Plants)
Average
Standard Deviation
Range , low-high
Flow
1/1000 kg
LHK
(23)
7,842
4,019
2,018-
17,000
Kill
1000 kg/day
(23)
435
309
89-
1,394
BOD5
kg/1000 kg
LHK
(20)
8.1
4.6
2.3-
18.4
Suspended
Solids
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(22)
5.9
4.0
0.6-
13.9
Grease
kg/1000 kg
LWK
(15)
3.0
2.1
0.8-
7.7
Kjeldahl
Nitrogen
as iV
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(6)
0.53
0.44
0.04-
1.3
Chlorides
as Cl
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(5)
3.6
2.7
0.5-
4.9
Total
Phosphorus
as P
kg/lWO kg
LWK
(4)
0.13
0.16
0.03-
0.43
Processed
Products
1000 kg/ day
(23)
54
52
3,0-
244.
Ratio of
Processed
Products
to Kill
(23)
0.14
0.09
0.016-
0.362
U)
                             Table 5.  Summary of Plant and Raw Waste Characteristics
                                       for High-Processing Packinghouses
Base
(Mumber of Plants)
Average
Standard Deviation
Range of low-high
Flow
1/1000 kg
LWK
<1 9)
12,514
4,394
5,444-
20,261
Kill
1000 kg/day
(19)
350
356
8.8-
1,233.
BOD5
kg/1000 kg
LWK
(19)
16.1
6.1
6.2-
30.5
Suspended
Solids
kg/1000 kg
LWK
(14)
10.5
6.3
1.7-
22.5
Grease
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(10)
9.0
8.3
2.8-
27.0
Kjeldahl
Nitrogen
as iV
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(3)
1.3
0.92
0.65-
2.7
Chlorides
as Cl
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(7)
15.6
11.3
0.8-
36.7
Total
Phosphorus
as P
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK
(3)
0.38
0.22
0.2-
0.63
Processed
Products
1000 kg/day
(19)
191
166
4.5-
t>31.
Ratio of
Processed
Products
to Kill
(19)
0.65
0.39
0.40-
2.14

-------
during this program.  Typical ranges are given  below  for  these  waste
parameters.   It should be noted that the values for dissolved solids in
the waste water are also affected by the dissolved solids content of the
plant water supply*
Nitrates and Nitrites as N, mg/1

         Kjeldahl nitrogen, mg/1

         Ammonia as N, mg/1

         Total dissolved solids, mg/1
0.01 - 0.85

  50 - 300

   7-50

 500 - 25,000
Bacteria are present in the raw waste from  meat  packing  plants.   The
usual  measure  is  in  terms  of coliforms, and for these the MPN  (most
probable number) typically is in the range of 2 to 4 million per 100 ml.

The process waste water normally is warm; it averages about 32°C  (90°F) ;
it reaches a high of about 38°C (100°F) during the kill  period,  and  a
low of about 27°C (80°F) during cleanup.  Biological treatment processes
operate  best  under  warm  conditions;  e.g., the optimum for anaerobic
lagoons is about 32°C  (90°F) ; hence, they are facilitated by  the  waste
water temperature.

The  pH  of  the process waste water is typically in the range of 6.5 to
8.5, although on occasion it may be outside this range.  An alkaline  pH
is  important  in the operation of anaerobic lagoons, as long as it does
not get above this range.
                         PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS

The most typical flow arrangement used in the meat packing  industry  is
shown schematically in Figure 7.  The system is used in about 70 percent
of  the  plants  studied.  The figure shows that most of the waste water
flows through a recovery system which consists of screening followed  by
a  catch  basin.   Frequently,  the  only  waste streams to by-pass this
system are the pen washing, sanitary wastes, hog scalding and  dehairing
wastewaters,  and  hide-processing  waste waters.  Pen washings normally
pass through a manure trap and then  are  mixed  with  the  other  waste
waters  before entering further treatment for discharge to a watercourse
or a municipal sewer.   Only  noncontaminated  water,  such  as  cooling
water, completely by-passes treatment; it usually discharges directly to
a  stream.  In plants in which barometric condensers are used, the water
can become contaminated.  Most of this water is sent to  further  treat-
ment.

-------
  Animal Pens
  Slaughtering
      Kill
{  Hide Removal
  Evisceration
     Paunch
 Scalding 5, Hair
     Removal
                    Screening
   Cutting
  Processing
                 (may follow-
                  catch basins)
Wet Well
& Pumps
                             Catch
                             Basins
                                                             Treatment
                                                             (Industrial or
                                                             Municipal)
1

t
By-Product Operations
r


Sanitary
Facilities
     Blood
     Hides
     Hair
     Tripe
   Rendering
      Casing
      Saving
(except  hair  & hides)
                 Domestic Uses
    Cooling
     Boiler
    Slowdown
             Figure  7.   Typical Wastewater Treatment System
                        Without Dissolved Air Flotation

-------
The  second  most  frequently  used  waste  water  arrangement  is shown
schematically in Figure 8.  In this flow arrangement, several low
grease bearing streams by-pass the screen and catch basin.  This permits
an increase in the detention time of  the  grease-bearing  stream  in  a
grease  recovery  system because the system can now handle a lower waste
water flow.  Low-grease-bearing waste waters normally originate from the
pens, some secondary  (by-product) processing, and sanitary wastes.  This
arrangement is commonly used when dissolved air flotation is included in
primary treatment.  A portion of the effluent from the flotation unit is
recycled to a pressurization tank where air is added for flotation.

Several modifications of the flow arrangement shown in Figure 8 are used
by the industry.  Some plants add chemicals to the waste  stream  via  a
mixing  tank just prior to the flotation unit.  Thisp usually, increases
grease and solid recovery but it also may increase the moisture  content
of  the  skimmings to 85 to 95 percent, making the handling of skimmings
more difficult.  Other plants may have two dissolved air flotation units
in series.  Chemicals are usually added to the waste stream entering the
second unit,  skimmings from the first unit are almost  always  rendered
while  those  from  the  second  unit,  which  contain chemicals, may be
landfilled.  A few plants add chemicals to both units to achieve a  high
wasteload  reduction.   Chemicals may reduce the rendering efficiency or
produce a finished grease that is unacceptable on the market.

A third flow arrangement, which has been installed  in  a  few  recently
built  plants, is shown in Figure 9.  The purpose of this arrangement is
to segregate waste streams according to the  type  of  treatment  to  be
applied.  In the scheme shown, the streams are divided into low and high
grease-bearing  streams, and manure-bearing streams.  For example, floor
drains located on the kill  floor  after  the  carcass  is  opened,  are
connected  to  the  high  grease-bearing  streams; hide processing waste
water is directed to the manure-bearing streams.  Segregation  into  the
three major waste streams permits optimum design of each catch basin and
flotation  unit  for  recovery  and  waste  load reduction, with minimum
investment in equipment.  A more detailed list of the segregated  stream
contents is given by Johnson. 8

Although  there  are  a  number of operations where waste water could be
reused or recycled, the industry is generally recycling or reusing  only
non-contaminated  coo'ling  water, as illustrated in Figures 7, 8, and 9.
One minor exception is reuse of lagoon water as cooling water.

-------
                       (may follow
                        catch basins)
Scalding & Hair
   Removal
 Figure 8.   Typical Wastewater Treatment  System
             Including Dissolved Air Flotation

-------
CO
                                                                                                            Manure-Bearing
                                                                                                            Wastewaters
                                      Sanitary
                                      Laundry
                                      Facilities
                                                                                            To Biological Treatment
                                                           To Separate Sewers or
                                                           Receiving Body of Water
                                 Figure  9.     Separate Treatment  of Grease-Bearing, Nongrease-Bearing
                                               and Manure-Bearing  Wastewaters
                                                                                                                          Solids

-------
                  WATER_USE -WASTELOAD RELATIONSHIPS

Increased water use causes increased pollutional wasteload in  the  meat
packing  industry.   This  was  verified  by  regression and correlation
analyses of individual plant data over long periods (up to  two  years),
and  also  on the data for each of the four subcategories.  For example,
multiple regression analysis of the data relating BODS wasteload to kill
and flow revealed that a  variation  of  one  standard  deviation  would
change  the predicted BOD5 for a simple slaughterhouse by 1,0 kg/1000 kg
LWK (1,0 lb/1000 Ib LWK); it would  change  the  predicted  load  for  a
complex  slaughterhouse  by  2.8  kg/1000  kg  LWK (2.8 lb/1000 Ib LWK).
Another regression analysis between BODS and flow on a LWK basis  showed
that  one  standard  deviation in flow changed the predicted BOD5 by 5.6
and 5.3 kg/1000 kg LWK (5,6 and 5.3 lb/1000 Ib LWK)  for low-  and  high-
processing packinghouses, respectively.

Figure  10  shows  the  average  and  range  of  the results of separate
regression analysis on the  flow-wasteload  data  from  each  of  eleven
plants.  This figure clearly illustrates that water use strongly affects
the  pollutional  wasteload  for  a plant in any given subcategory.  For
example, the figures show that a  20  percent  reduction  in  water  use
would,  on the average, result in a BODS reduction of 3,5 kg/1000 kg LWK
(3.5 lb/1000 Ib LWK) .

Further evidence for the dependence of pollutional  wasteload  on  water
flow  is  that,  in  three of the four subcategories,  the plant with the
lowest wasteload also had the lowest water  use.   In  the  fourth  sub-
category,  the  plant  with  the  lowest wasteload had the second lowest
water use.  Moreover, substantially improved effluent quatity was  found
for   those  plants  which  conserved  water  use  as  part  of  general
housekeeping practices.

Low  water  use,  and  consequently  low  absolute  wasteload,  requires
efficient  water  management  practices.   For  example,  available data
showed that two simple slaughter houses practice  very  good  water  use
practices.   The plants both had wasteloads of about 2 kg/1000 kg LWK (2
lb/1000 Ib LWK) ; their wastewater flows ranged from 1333 to 2415  1/1000
kg  LWK   (166  to  290  gal/1000  Ib  LWK).   One  plant was an old beef
slaughterhouse; the other, a new hog slaughterhouse.    This  outstanding
performance  was achieved in a sugcategory for which the flows ranged to
21,000 1/1000 kg LWK (1750 gal/1000 Ib LWK),  and  for  which  the  BODS
loading ranged to over 14 kg/1000 kg LWK  (14 lb/1000  Ib LWK).
                                  49

-------
   15-
-1 ID-
S'
2
 in
a
§
    5-
        I
                                   I
                                    I
                                     I
                              I
                                w
                               I
                                I
I
                          I
                             I


                            /
 Average  for
Individual  Plants
                            Gal/1000 Ibs LWK
                         500                  1000
              2000     4000     6000
                      Liters/1000  kg U/VK
                   6000    (OPOO
        Figure 10.  Effect of Water Use on Waeteload
                  for Individual Plants
                            50

-------
                         SOURCES .OF WASTEWATER

                              Animal Pens

Although  pen  wastes  only contain an estimated 0.25 kg of BOD5/1000 kg
LWX, 9 the wastes are high  in  nutrients.  l°   Frequently,  the  solid
wastes  are  removed by dry cleaning* followed by little or no washdown.
If the pens are washed down, a manure trap is frequently used to recover
solids rather than letting them enter a treatment system.  Any  rainfall
or  snowmelt  runoff is normally contained and routed for treatment with
other raw waste flows.

Another waste water source in the pens is the  watering  troughs.   Each
trough  may discharge 8 1/min (2.1 gal/min) or more.  With perhaps 50 or
more pens in a large plant, the water source becomes  significant.   The
total  waste from the pens, however, is a minor contributor to the waste
load.


                              Slaughtering

The slaughtering operation is the largest single source of wasteload  in
a meat packing plant, and blood is the major contributor.  Blood is rich
in  BODS,  chlorides,  and  nitrogen.  It has an ultimate BOD of 405,000
mg/1 and a BODS between 150,00 and 200,000 mg/1. ** Cattle contain up to
50 pounds of blood per animal, and typically only 35 pounds of the blood
are recovered in the sticking  and  bleeding  area.   The  remaining  15
pounds  of blood are lost as wastes which represents a wasteload of 2.25
to 3.0 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK (2.25 to 3.0 lb/1000 Ib LWK).  Total loss  of
the  blood represents a potential BODS wasteload of 7.4 to 15 kg/1000 kg
LWK  (7.5 to 15 lb/1000 Ib LWK).   Because very few meat  plants  practice
blood  control  outside of the bleeding area, the typical BODS load from
blood losses in the slaughtering operation is estimated to be 3  kg/1000
kg LWK,   In beef plants, much of this loss occurs duririg hide removal.

Beef  paunch  or  rumen  contents is another major source of waste load.
Paunch manure, which contains partially digested feed  material,  has  a
BODS  of  50,000  mg/1. l2  At an average paunch weight of 50 pounds per
head, dumping of the entire contents can contribute 2.5 kg/1000 kg  LWK.
However,  the common practices are to either screen the paunch contents,
washing the solids on the screen  (wet dumping), or to dump on  a  screen
to  recover  the  solids,  allowing only the "juice" to run to the sewer
(dry dumping) .  Because 60 to 80 percent of the BODS in  the  paunch  is
water soluble, wet dumping of the paunch represents a BOD5 loss of about
1.5 kg/1000 kg LWK.  If dry dumping is practiced, the pollutional waste-
load  is much less than this.  When none of the paunch is sewered but is
processed or hauled out of the plant for land disposal,  paunch  handling
does  not  contribute  to  the  wasteload.  Nevertheless, cooking of the
rumen or paunch in a hot alkaline solution (tripe processing)   will  add
                                  51

-------
to   the  wasteload,  particularly  to  the  grease  load.   The  strong
alkalinity of these waste waters may  also  make  grease  recovery  more
difficult.

The hog scald tank and dehairing machine are other sources of pollution.
The overflow from a hog scald tank is usually about 8U 1/1000 kg LWK (10
gal/1000  Ib  LWK)   at  a  BOD5  loss  of  about  3000 mg/1.  This could
represent a BODS loss of about 0.25 kg/1000 kg LWK.  Continuous overflow
of water from the dehairing machine is estimated to contribute a maximum
BOD5 load of 0,4 kg/1000 kg LWK.

Other sources of waste from the slaughtering of animals and dressing  of
carcasses  is  from  carcass  washing, viscera and offal processing, and
from stomach and peck flushing.

The offal operations such as chitterling washing and cleaning intestinal
casings can contribute to the pollution load of a plant.  If  the  slime
waste  from  the  casings  is  not  sewered,  the  wasteload  from these
operations would be greatly reduced.

The highest source of water use in slaughtering is from the  washing  of
carcasses;  an  extreme example for which data are available shows rates
of 2915 1/min  (350 gal/min).  Flushing the manure from  chitterling  and
viscera,  or  conveyer  sterilizing, and the tripe "umbrella" washer are
other high water use operations.


                            Mgat Processing

The major pollutants from meat processing are meat  extracts,  meat  and
fatty  tissue,  and  curing  and  pickling  solutions.   Loss  of  these
solutions  can  be  the  major  contributor  to  the  waste  load   from
processing.   The  results of a recent study showed that only 25 percent
of the curing brine remained in the product. 11  The rest of  the  brine
is  lost  to  the  s.ewer.  This source of chlorides, plus others such as
from  hide  curing  and  the  use  of  salt  on  the  floors  to  reduce
slipperiness, explains why some packinghouse wastes have high chlorides,
A. content of 100C mg/1 of chlorides is not uncommon in the effluent from
a  packinghouse.  Another constituuent of the cure is dextrose; it has a
BODS equivalent of 2/3 kg/kg (Ib/lb).  Consequently, packinghouses  with
a  sizeable  curing facility will have high BODS waste unless the wastes
from curing are segregated or recycled.  In one plant over  2000  pounds
of  dextrose was lost daily. *3  The pollution load  from meat and fatty
tissue can be substantially reduced by dry clean-up prior  to  washdown.
The  water use in meat processing should be primarily limited to cleanup
operations and to product washing, cooling, and cooking.
                                  52

-------
                   secondary Manufacturing Processes

Secondary manufacturing processes, as described in Section IV, are those
by-product operations within the industry for  the  handling,  recovery,
and  processing  of blood, trimmings, and inedible offal.  This includes
paunch  and  viscera  handling,  hide  processing,, hair  recovery   and
processing,  and edible and inedible rendering*  Tnpse viscera and offal
operations that occur on the slaughtering floor, such as paunch handling
and tripe processing, were considered under slaughtering.

The hashing and washing of viscera, often performed prior to  rendering,
produces  a strong waste load with a BOD5 value of about 70,000 mg/1. 11
The waste conservation .trend in the past few years has been  toward  not
hashing  and  washing prior to rendering, but sending the uncleaned vis-
cera directly to rendering.  In one plant, removal  of  the  hasher  and
washer  reduced  the  BOD5  to the waste treatment plant by 910 kg (2000
pounds)  per day, with an attendant increase in the rendered animal  feed
production.

Efficient  recovery  of  hog  hair  is  now  practiced widely within the
industry, although tl-je market for tfcis by-product has  been  reduced  in
recent  years.   Very few plants hydrolyze hog hair, but rather wash and
bale for sale or dispose of it directly to land fill.   The  waste  load
from  the  recovery  and  washing of the hair is estimated to contribute
less than 0.7 kg/1000 kg LWK.

Hide curing  operations  are  becoming  increasingly  involved  at  meat
packing  plants*   Just  a few years ago many plants were shipping hides
green or in salt pack.  Today, however, many beef  slaughter  operations
include  hide  curing  in tanks, vats, or raceways.  The hides, prior to
being soaked in brine, are washed and defleshed.  These washings,  which
are sewered, contain blood, dirt, manure, and flesh.  In most defleshing
operations  the  bulk  of the tissue is recovered.  In addition to these
wastes,  soaking the hide in the brine  results  in  a  net  overflow  of
approximately  7.7  liters (2 gallons) of brine solution per hide.  In a
faw plants the brine in the raceway is dumped weekly, whereas in  others
it  is  dumped  yearly  or whenever the solids build up to a point where
they interfere with the hide curing operation.  The life  of  the  brine
can be extended by pumping the recycled brine over a vibrating or static
screen.   The waste load from the overflow and washings in a typical hide
curing  operation,  where  the  hide  curing  wastes  are not frequently
dumped,  is about 1.5 kg/1000 kg LWK for BODS and about U kg/1000 kg  LWK
for salt.

Blood processing may be either wet or dry.  Continuous dryers, which are
quite  common,  use  a  jacketed  vessel with rotating blades to prevent
burn-on; this process results in low losses to the sewer  (estimated  to
contribute  about  0.3 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK).  Continuous ring dryers are
sometimes used: they produce a relatively small amount  of  blood  water
                                  53

-------
that,  in  some  small  plants,  is  discharged  to  the sewer.  The old
technique  of  steam  sparging  the  blood  to  coagulate  it  is  still
frequently used.  The coagulated blood is separated from the blood water
by  screening.   The blood water has a BODS of about 30,000 ing/I.  It is
often sewered, contributing a waste load of about 1.3  kg/1000  kg  LWK.
This  loss  can  be eliminated by evaporating the blood water, either by
itself or by combining it with other materials in conventional  inedible
dry rendering operations.

Wet  rendering  and  low  temperature  rendering  are  potentially large
sources of pollution.  Tank water from wet rendering  can  have  a  BOD5
value  of  25,000  to  15,000  mg/1,  and the water centrifuged from low
temperature rendering can have a BODS of 30,000 to 40,COO mg/1.   It  is
estimated  that sewering of either of the waste streams produces a waste
load of 2 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK,  These waste loads can be  eliminated  by
evaporation  or  combining  with  other  materials  used in dry inedible
rendering.  Triple-effect vacuum evaporators are often used  to  concen-
trate  the  "tankwater" from the wet rendering operation.  The wasteload
from wet rendering is primarily caused by overflow or foaming  into  the
barometric  leg  of  these  evaporators  and  discharge to the sewer orp
sometimes directly to a stream.  From dry rendering the pollution  comes
from the condensing vapors, from spillage, and from clean-up operations.
A  recent study revealed that a typical dryer used 454 to 492 1/min  (120
to 130 gal/min) of water for condensing vapors, and  that  the  effluent
contained  118 mg/1 of BODS and 27 mg/1 grease.  The estimated wasteload
from dry rendering is 0.5 kg/1000 kg LWK.


                                cutting

The main pollutants from cutting operations are meat and fat scraps from
trimming,  and  bone  dust  from  sawing  operations.   Most  of   these
pollutants  enter  the  waste  stream during clean-up operations.  These
wastes can be reduced by removing the majority of them by  dry  clean-up
prior to washdown, and, also, by some form of grease trap in the cutting
area.   The  collected material can be used directly in rendering.  Bone
dust is a large source of phosphorus and, when mixed  with  water,  does
not  settle  out readily; thus it is difficult to recover, and should be
captured in a box under the saw.


                                Clean-Up

Macon6 found that clean-up contributes between 0.3 and 3 kg BOD5/1000 kg
LWK in small packinghouses.  Data collected by the  Iowa  Department  of
Environmental  Quality showed that anywhere from 27 to 56 percent of the
total BODS waste load is contained in the clean-up  waste  waters.   The
clean-up operation, thus, is a major contributor to the waste load.  It,
also,   leads   to   a  significant  loss  of  recoverable  by-products.
                                  54

-------
Detergents used in clean-up  can  adversely
grease recovery in the plant catch basin.
affect  the  efficiency  of
The techniques and procedures used during clean-up can greatly influence
the  water  use  in  a  plant and the total pollutional waste load.   For
example, dry cleaning of floors prior to wash down to remove scraps   and
dry  scraping  of the blood from the bleed area into the blood sewer are
first steps.  A light wash down, again  draining  to  the  blood  sewer,
before  the normal washdown definitely decreases the pollution load  from
clean-up.
                                  55

-------

-------
                               SECTION VI

                   SELECTION OF POLLUTANT PARAMETERS


                          SELECTED PARAMETERS

Based on a review of the Corps of Engineers Permit Applications from the
meat packing plants, previous studies on waste waters from meat  packing
plants,  3fis  industry  data, questionnaire data, published reports, **
and data obtained from sampling plant waste waters  during  this  study,
the following chemical, physical, and biological constituents constitute
pollutants or measures of pollution as defined in the Act.

         BOD5 (5 day, 20°C biochemical oxygen demand)
         COD  (chemical oxygen demand)
         Total suspended solids
         Dissolved solids
         Oil and Grease
         Ammonia nitrogen (and other nitrogen forms)
         Phosphorus
         Temperature
         Fecal Coliforms
         PH

On  the  basis  of  all evidence reviewed, there do not exist any purely
hazardous types of pollutants (such as heavy metals  or  pesticides)  in
the  waste  discharged  from  the  meat processing plants.  In addition,
except for those parameters for which limitations are established   (BOD,
TSS, oil and grease, pH, and fecal coliforms)  the data or the technology
are inadequate to substantiate reliable limitations at this time.


            RATIONALE_FOR SELECTION OF IDENTIFIED PARAMETERS

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)

Biochemical  oxygen  demand   (BOD)  is a measure of the oxygen consuming
capabilities of organic matter and is the most  important  parameter  in
characterizing  the  highly organic raw wastes from meat products plants
The BOD does not in itself cause direct harm to a water system,  but  it
does  exert  an  indirect effect by depressing the oxygen content of the
water,  sewage and other organic effluents  during  their  processes  of
decomposition  exert  a BOD, which can have a catastrophic effect on the
ecosystem by  depleting  the  oxygen  supply.   Conditions  are  reached
frequently  where  all  of  the  oxygen is used and the continuing decay
process causes the production of noxious gases such as hydrogen  sulfide
and   methane.   Water  with  a  high  BOD  indicates  the  presence  of
                                  57

-------
decomposing organic matter and subsequent
degrade its quality and potential uses.
high  bacterial  counts  that
Dissolved   oxygen   (DO)  is  a  water  quality  constituent  that,  in
appropriate concentrations, is essential, not  only  to  keep  organisms
living  but  also  to  sustain  species  reproduction,  vigor,  and  the
development of populations.  Organisms undergo stress  at  reduced  D.O.
concentrations that make them less competitive and able to sustain their
species  within  the  aquatic  environment.   For  example,  reduced  DO
concentrations have been shown to interfere with fish population through
delayed hatching of eggs, reduced size and vigor of embryos,  production
of  deformities in young, interference with food digestion, acceleration
of blood clotting, decreased tolerance  to  certain  toxicants,  reduced
food  efficiency and growth rate, and reduced maximum sustained swimming
speed.   Fish  food  organisms  are  likewise  affected   adversely   in
conditions with suppressed DO.  Since all aerobic aquatic organisms need
a  certain amount of oxygen, the consequences of total lack of dissolved
oxygen due to a high BOD can kill all inhabitants of the affected area.

If a high BOD is present, the quality of the water is  usually  visually
degraded  by  the presence of decomposing materials and algae blooms due
to the uptake of degraded materials that  form  the  foodstuffs  of  the
algal populations.

Chemical Oxygen Demand... (COPL

is  a parameter associated with BOD, COD is a measure of the presence of
materials not readily degradable by microorganisms; thus relates to  the
demand  for  chemically bound oxygen as opposed to the dissolved oxygen.
For example, complex cellulosic materials exert  COD  over  an  extended
period  and  accordingly  disrupt  chemical  balances  in  streams.  COD
provides a rapid determination of the waste strength.   Its  measurement
will  indicate  a serious plant or treatment malfunction long before the
BOD5 can be run.  A given plant or waste treatment system usually has  a
relatively narrow range of COD:BOD5 ratios, if the waste characteristics
are  fairly  constant,  so  experience  permits  a  judgment  to be made
concerning plant operation from COD values.  In the industry, COD ranges
from about 1.5 to 5 times the BODS; the ratio may be to the low  end  of
the  range  for  raw  wastes,  and near the high end following secondary
treatment when the readily degraded material has been  reduced  to  very
low levels.

Total Suspended Solids.

Suspended  solids  include  both  organic  and inorganic materials.  The
inorganic components include sand, silt, and clay.  The organic fraction
includes such materials as grease, oil, tar, animal and vegetable  fats,
various fibers, sawdust,  hair, and various materials from sewers.  These
solids may settle out rapidly and bottom deposits are often a mixture of
                                  58

-------
both  organic  and inorganic solids.  They adversely affect fisheries by
covering the bottom of the stream or lake with  a  blanket  of  material
that destroys the fish-food bottom fauna or the spawning ground of fish.
Deposits containing organic materials may deplete bottom oxygen supplies
and produce hydrogen sulfidef carbon dioxide, methane, and other noxious
gases.

In  raw  water  sources  for  domestic  use, state and regional agencies
generally specify that suspended solids in streams shall not be  present
in  sufficient  concentration  to  be objectionable or to interfere with
normal treatment processes.  Suspended solids  in  water  may  interfere
with  many  industrial  processes,  and  cause  foaming  in  boilers, or
encrustations  on  equipment  exposed  to  water,  especially   as   the
temperature  rises.   Suspended  solids  are  undesirable  in  water for
textile  industries;  paper  and  pulp;   beverages ;   dairy   products ;
laundries;  dyeing ;  photography;  cooling  systems,  and  power plants.
Suspended particles also serve as a transport mechanism  for  pesticides
and  other  substances  which  are  readily  sorbed  into  or  onto clay
particles.

Solids may be suspended in water for a time, and then settle to the  bed
of  the  stream  or lake.  These settleable solids discharged with man's
wastes  may  be  inert,  slowly  biodegradable  materials,  or   rapidly
decomposable   substances.   While  in  suspension,  they  increase  the
turbidity  of  the  water,  reduce  light  penetration  and  impair  the
photosynthetic activity of aquatic plants.

Solids in suspension are aesthetically displeasing.  When they settle to
form sludge deposits on the stream or lake bed, they are often much more
damaging to the life in water, and they retain the capacity to displease
the  senses.   Solids,  when  transformed  to  sludge deposits, may do a
variety of damaging things, including blanketing the stream or lake  bed
and  thereby  destroying  the  living spaces for those benthic organisms
that would otherwise  occupy  the  habitat.   When  of  an  organic  and
therefore  decomposable  nature,  solids  use  a  portion  or all of the
dissolved oxygen available in the area.  Organic materials, also,  serve
as  a seemingly inexhaustible food source for sludgeworms and associated
organisms.

Turbidity is principally a measure of the light absorbing properties  of
suspended  solids.   It  is  frequently  used  as a substitute method of
quickly estimating the total suspended solids when the concentration  is
relatively low.

          Solids
The  dissolved solids in the raw waste water are mainly inorganic salts,
and the salt present in the largest amount is sodium chloride (described
below) .  Loadings of dissolved solids thus vary to a large  extent  with
                                  59

-------
the  amount  of  sodium  chloride  entering  the waste stream.  However,
values of 1500 mg/1 or more may be encountered.   The  dissolved  solids
are  particularly  important  in  that they are relatively unaffected by
biological  treatment  processes.   Unless  removed,   the   salts   may
accumulate  in recycle or reuse systems within a plant.  The presence of
sulfates is a further hindrance to treatment systems since sulfates  are
reduced  to sulfides  (causing odors) in anaerobic system.  The dissolved
solids at discharge concentration  may  be  harmful  to  vegetation  and
preclude  various  irrigation  practices.   Specific  data for dissolved
solids in treated effluents is limited; the technical sophistication and
cost of salt removal systems is high and beyond the scope  of  even  the
best  current treatment systems addressed in this study.  Limitations on
dissolved solids are therefore not being specified at this  time.   This
same  circumstance  applies  to  chlorides  (a dissolved salt) which are
described below in more detail.  In natural waters the dissolved  solids
consist  mainly  of  carbonates,  chlorides,  sulfates,  phosphates, and
possibly nitrates of calcium, magnesium,  sodium,  and  potassium,  with
traces of iron, manganese and other substances.

Many  communities  in the United States and in other countries use water
supplies containing 20CO to UOOO mg/1 of dissolved salts, when no better
water is available.  Such waters  are  not  palatable,  may  not  quench
thirst,  and may have a laxative action on new users.  Waters containing
more than 4000 mg/1 of total salts are generally  considered  unfit  for
human  use, although in hot climates such higher salt concentrations can
be tolerated whereas they could not be in  temperate  climates.   Waters
containing  5000  mg/1  or  more  are  reported  to be bitter and act as
bladder and intestinal irritants.  It is generally agreed that the  salt
concentration of good, palatable water should not exceed 500 mg/1.

Limiting  concentrations  of  dissolved  solids for fresh-water fish may
range from  5,000  to  10,000  mg/1,  according  to  species  and  prior
acclimatization.  Some fish are adapted to living in more saline waters,.
and a few species of fresh-water forms have been found in natural waters
with  a  salt  concentration  of 15,000 to 20,000 mg/1.  Fish can slowly
become acclimatized to higher salinities, but  fish  in  waters  of  low
salinity  cannot  survive  sudden  exposure  to high salinities, such as
those resulting from discharges of oil-well  brines.   Dissolved  solids
may influence the toxicity of heavy metals and organic compounds to fish
and  other aquatic life, primarily because of the antagonistic effect of
hardness on metals.

Waters with total dissolved solids over 500 mg/1 have decreasing utility
as irrigation water.  At 5,000 mg/1 water has little  or  no  value  for
irrigation.

Dissolved  solids  in industrial waters can cause foaming in boilers and
cause interference with cleaness,  color,  or  taste  of  many  finished
                                  60

-------
products.
corrosion.
High  contents  of  dissolved solids also tend to accelerate
Specific conductance is a measure of the capacity of water to convey  an
electric  current.   This property is related to the total concentration
of ionized substances in water and water temperature.  This property  is
frequently  used  as  a  substitute  method  of  quickly  estimating the
dissolved solids concentration.

Oil and Grease

Grease, also called oil and grease,  or  hexane  solubles,  is  a  major
pollutant in the raw waste stream of meat packing plants.  The source of
grease  is  primarily  from carcass dressing, washing, trimming, viscera
handling, rendering and clean-up  operations.   Grease  forms  unsightly
films on the water, interferes with aquatic life, clogs sewers, disturbs
biological  processes  in sewage treatment plants, and can also become a
fire hazard.  The loading of grease in the raw waste load varies widely,
from C.25 to 27 kg/1999 kg LWK (0.25 to 27 lb/1000 Ib LWK).  This  would
correspond to an average concentration of about 650 mg/1.  Grease may be
harmful  to  municipal  treatment  facilities  particularly to trickling
filters.  Oil and grease exhibit an oxygen demand.   Oil  emulsions  may
adhere to the gills of fish or coat and destroy algae or other plankton.
Deposition  of  oil  in the bottom sediments can serve to exhibit normal
benthic growths, thus interrupting the aquatic food chain.  Soluble  and
emulsified  material  ingested  by fish may taint the flavor of the fish
flesh.  Water  soluble  components  may  exert  toxic  action  on  fish.
Floating  oil  may  reduce  the  re-aeration of the water surface and in
conjunction with  emulsified  oil  may  interfere  with  photosynthesis.
Water insoluble components damage the plumage and costs of water animals
and  fowls.   oil  and  grease in a water can result in the formation of
objectionable surface slicks preventing the full aesthetic enjoyment  of
the water.             .

Ammonia

Ammonia  is  a  common  product  of the decomposition of organic matter.
Dead and decaying animals and plants along with human  and  animal  body
wastes  account  for much of the ammonia entering the aquatic ecosystem.
Ammonia exists in its non-ionized form only at higher pH levels  and  is
the  most  toxic  in  this  state.   The  lower the pH, the more ionized
ammonia is formed and its tox.icity decreases.  Ammonia, in the  presence
of  dissolved  oxygen,  is  converted  to  nitrate   (NO£)  by nitrifying
bacteria.  Nitrite (NO2),  which  is  an  intermediate  product  between
ammonia  and nitrate, sometimes occurs in quantity when depressed oxygen
conditions  permit.   Ammonia  can  exist  in  several  other   chemical
combinations including ammonium chloride and other salts.
                                  61

-------
Nitrates  are  considered  to  be  among  the  poisonous  ingredients of
mineralized waters, with potassium nitrate  being  more  poisonous  than
sodium  nitrate.  Excess nitrates cause irritation of the mucous linings
of the gastrointestinal tract and the bladder; the symptoms are diarrhea
and diuresis, and drinking one liter of water  containing  500  mg/1  of
nitrate can cause such symptoms.

Infant  methemoglobinemia,  a  disease characterized by certain specific
blood changes and cyanosis, may be caused by high nitrate concentrations
in the water used for preparing feeding formulae.   While  it  is  still
impossible  to  state  precise  concentration limits, it has been widely
recommended that water containing more than 10 mg/1 of nitrate  nitrogen
(NO3-N)   should not be used for infants.  Nitrates are, also, harmful in
fermentation processes and can cause disagreeable tastes  in  beer.   In
most  natural  water  the  pH  range  is  such that ammonium ions  (NH4+)
predominate.  In alkaline waters, however, high  concentrations  of  un-
ionized   ammonia  in  undissociated  ammonium  hydroxide  increase  the
toxicity of ammonia solutions.  In streams polluted with sewage,  up  to
one  half  of  the  nitrogen  in  the  sewage may be in the form of free
ammonia, and sewage may carry up to 35 mg/1 of total nitrogen.   It  has
been  shown  that at a level of 1.0 mg/1 un-ionized ammonia, the ability
of hemoglobin to combine with oxygen is impaired and fish may suffocate.
Evidence indicates that ammonia exerts a considerable  toxic  effect  on
all  aquatic  life  within  a  range  of  less than 1.0 mg/1 to 25 mg/1,
depending on the pH and dissolved oxygen level present.

Ammonia can add to the problem of eutrophication by  supplying  nitrogen
through  its  breakdown  products.   Some  lakes in warmer climates, and
others that are aging guickly are  sometimes  limited  by  the  nitrogen
available.   Any  increase  will  speed  up  the  plant growth and decay
process.
During the past 30 years, a formidable case has developed for the belief
that increasing standing crops of aquatic  plant  growths,  which  often
interfere  with  water  uses  and  are  nuisances to man, frequently are
caused  by  increasing  supplies  of  phosphorus.   such  phenomena  are
associated  with  a  condition of accelerated eutrophication or aging of
waters.  It is generally recognized that  phosphorus  is  not  the  sole
cause  of  eutrophication, but there is evidence to substantiate that it
is frequently the key element in all of the elements required  by  fresh
water  plants  and  is generally present in the least amount relative to
need.  Therefore, an increase in phosphorus allows use of other, already
present, nutrients for plant growths.  Phosphorus is usually  described,
for this reasons, as a "limiting factor."

When  a  plant  population  is  stimulated  in  production and attains a
nuisance  status,  a  large  number  of   associated   liabilities   are
                                  62

-------
immediately  apparent.   Dense  populations  of pond weeds make swimming
dangerous.  Boating and  water  skiing  and  sometimes  fishing  may  be
eliminated  because of the mass of vegetation that serves as an physical
impediment to such activities.  Plant populations have  been  associated
with  stunted  fish  populations and with poor fishing.  Plant nuisances
emit vile stenches, impart tastes and odors to  water  supplies,  reduce
the  efficiency  of  industrial  and  municipal  water treatment, impair
aesthetic beauty, reduce or  restrict  resort  trade,  lower  waterfront
property  values,  cause  skin  rashes  to man during water contact, and
serve as a desired substrate and breeding ground for flies.

Phosphorus in the elemental form is particularly toxic, and  subject  to
bioaccumulation  in  much  the same way as mercury.  Colloidal elemental
phosphorus will poison marine fish (causing skin  tissue  breakdown  and
discoloration).   Also,  phosphorus is capable of being concentrated and
will accumulate in organs and soft tissues.  Experiments have shown that
marine fish will concentrate phosphorus from water containing as  little
as 1 ug/1.

Temperature

Because  of  the  long detention time at ambient temperatures associated
with typically large biological treatment systems used for treating meat
packing waste water, the temperature of the  final  effluent  from  most
packing  plants  will  be  virtually  the same as the temperature of the
receiving body  of  water.   Noncontaminated  cooling  waters  that  are
discharged  directly  will tend to have a maximum of 40-U3°C (105-110°F)
during the summer months, and will be cooler at other times of the year.
The quantity of this cooling water is small compared  with  the  process
waste  water  flow.  The temperature of the raw waste typically averages
about 32°C (90°F), with a high of about 38°F  (100°F)  during  the  kill
period and a low of about 27°C (80°F) during the clean-up period.  These
temperatures  are  an  asset  for  biological  treatment  of  the waste,
maintaining high rates of growth of the microorganisms  upon  which  the
treatment  depends.   Temperature  is  one  of  the  most  important and
influential water quality characteristics.  Temperature determines those
species that may  be  present;  it  activates  the  hatching  of  young,
regulates  their activity, and stimulates or suppresses their growth and
development; it attracts, and may kill when the water becomes too hot or
becomes  chilled  too  suddenly.    Colder  water  generally   suppresses
development.   Warmer  water generally accelerates activity and may be a
primary cause  of  aquatic  plant  nuisances  when  other  environmental
factors are suitable.

Temperature  is  a prime regulator of natural processes within the water
environment.  It  governs  physiological  functions  in  organisms  and,
acting  directly  or  indirectly in combination with other water quality
constituents, it affects aquatic life with each change.   These  effects
include   chemical   reaction   rates,  enzymatic  functions,  molecular
                                  63

-------
movements, and molecular exchanges between membranes within and
the physiological systems and the organs of an animal.
between
Chemical  reaction rates vary with temperature and generally increase as
the temperature is increased.  The solubility of gases in  water  varies
with  temperature.   Dissolved  oxygen  is  decreased  by  the  decay or
decomposition  of  dissolved  organic  substances  and  the  decay  rate
increases  as  the temperature of the water increases reaching a maximum
at about 30°C  (86°F).   The temperature  of  stream  water,  even  during
summer,   is   below  the  optimum  for  pollution-associated  bacteria.
Increasing the water temperature increases the bacterial  multiplication
rate when the environment is favorable and the food supply is abundant.

Reproduction   cycles   may   be   changed  significantly  by  increased
temperature  because  this  function  takes   place   under   restricted
temperature  ranges.   spawning may not occur at all because temperatures
are too high.  Thus,  a fish population may exist in a heated  area  only
by  continued  immigration.   Disregarding  the  decreased  reproductive
potential, water temperatures1 need not reach lethal levels to decimate a
species.  Temperatures that favor competitors, predators, parasites, and
disease can destroy a species at levels far below those that are lethal.

Fish food organisms are altered severely when temperatures  approach  or
exceed  90°F.   Predominant  algal species change, primary production is
decreased, and bottom associated organisms may be  depleted  or  altered
drastically  in  numbers and distribution.  Increased water temperatures
may cause aquatic plant nuisances when other environmental  factors  are
favorable.

Synergistic  actions  of  pollutants  are  more  severe  at higher water
temperatures.  Given amounts of domestic sewage, refinery wastes,  oils,
tars,  insecticides,   detergents,  and  fertilizers more rapidly deplete
oxygen in water at higher temperatures, and  the  respective  toxicities
are likewise increased.

When  water  temperatures  increase,  the  predominant algal species may
change from diatoms to green algae, and finally at high temperatures  to
blue-green  algae,  because of species temperature preferentials.  Blue-
green  algae  can  cause  serious  odor  problems.    The   number   and
distribution  of  benthic  organisms  decreases  as  water  temperatures
increase above 90°F,  which is close  to  the  tolerance  limit  for  the
population.   This  could  seriously  affect certain fish that depend on
benthinc organisms as a food source.

The cost of fish being attracted to heated water in winter months may be
considerable, due to fish mortalities that  may  result  when  the  fish
return to the cooler water.
                                  64

-------
Rising,  temperatures stimulate the decomposition of sludge, formation of
sludge  gas,  multiplication   of   saprophytic   bacteria   and   fungi
(particularly in the presence of organic wastes), and the consumption of
oxygen by putrefactive processes, thus affecting the esthetic value of a
water course.

In  general, marine water temperatures do not change as rapidly or range
as widely  as  those  of  freshwaters.   Marine  and  estuarine  fishes,
therefore,  are  less  tolerant of temperature variation.  Although this
limited tolerance is greater in estuarine  than  in  open  water  marine
species,  temperature  changes  are  more  important  to those fishes in
estuaries and bays than to those in open marine areas,  because  of  the
nursery and replenishment functions of the estuary that can be adversely
affected by extreme temperature changes.

E^ca! Coliforms
                                                        i
Fecal coliforms are used as an indicator since they have originated from
the  intestinal  tract of warm blooded animals.  Their presence in water
indicates the potential presence of pathogenic bacteria and viruses.

The presence of coliforms, more specifically fecal coliforms,  in  water
is  indicative  of  fecal  pollution.  In general, the presence of fecal
coliform., organisms  indicates  recent  and  possibly  dangerous   fecal
contamination.   When  the fecal coliform count exceeds 2,000 per 100 ml
there is a high correlation with increased numbers  of  both  pathogenic
viruses and bapteria.

Many microorganisms, pathogenic to humans and animals, may be carried in
surface  water,  particularly  that  derived from effluent sources which
find their way into surface water from municipal and industrial  wastes.
The  diseases . associated  with  bacteria  include bacillary and amoebic
dysentery. Salmonella gastroenteritis, typhoid and  paratyphoid  fevers,
leptospirosis,  chlorea,  vibriosis  and  infectious  hepatitis.  Recent
studies have emphasized the value of fecal coliform density in assessing
the occurrence of Salmonella, a common  bacterial  pathogen  in  surface
water.   Field studies involving irrigation water, field crops and soils
indicate that when the fecal coliform density in stream waters  exceeded
1,000 per 100 ml, the occurrence of Salmonella was 53.5 percent.
                                  65

-------
E3f Acidity and Alkalinity

Th*?  usual pH for raw waste falls between 6.5 and 8.5; unusual processes
such as hog hair hydrolyzing may raise this slightly,  but not enough  to
significantly   offset  treatment  effectiveness  or  effluent  quality.
However, some adjustment may be required, particularly if pH  adjustment
has  been  used  to lower the pH for protein precipitation, or if the pH
has been raised for ammonia stripping.  The pH of the waste  water  then
should  be returned to its normal range before discharge.  The effect of
chemical additions for pH adjustment should be taken into consideration,
as new pollutants could result.  Acidity and alkalinity  are  reciprocal
terms.   Acidity is produced by substances that yield hydrogen ions upon
hydrolysis and alkalinity is produced by substances that yield  hydroxyl
ions.   The  terms "total acidity" and "total alkalinity" are often used
to express the buffering capacity of a  solution.   Acidity  in  natural
waters  is  caused  by carbon dioxide, mineral acids,  weakly dissociated
acids, and the salts of strong acids  and  weak  bases.   Alkalinity  is
caused by strong bases and the gaits of strong alkalies and weak acids.

The term pH is a logarithmic expression of the concentration of hydrogen
ions.   At  a  pH of 7, the hydrogen and hydroxyl ion concentrations are
essentially equal and the water is neutral.  Lower  pH  values  indicate
acidity  while  higher  values  indicate  alkalinity.    The relationship
between pH and acidity  or  alkalinity  is  not  necessarily  linear  or
direct.
Waters  with  a  pH
distribution lines,
such  constituents
lead.  The hydrogen
water.   At  a  low
chlorine is weakened
the pH close to 7.
water.
 below  6,0 are corrosive to water works structures,
and household plumbing fixtures  and  can  thus  add
to drinking water as iron, copper, zinc, cadmium and
ion concentration can  affect  the  "taste"  of  the
 pH water tastes "sour".  The bactericidal effect of
 as the pH increases, and it is advantageous to keep
This is very significant for providing safe drinking
Extremes of pH or rapid pH changes can exert stress conditions  or  kill
aquatic  life  outright.   Dead  fish, associated algal blooms, and foul
stenches are aesthetic  liabilities  of  any  waterway.   Even  moderate
changes  from "acceptable" criteria limits of pH are deleterious to some
species.  The relative toxicity to aquatic life  of  many  materials  is
increased  by  changes  in  the  water  pH.  Metalocyanide complexes can
increase a thousand-fold in toxicity with a drop of 1.5 pH  units.   The
availability  of many nutrient substances varies with the alkalinity and
acidity.  Ammonia is more lethal with a higher pH.

The lacrimal fluid of the human eye has a pH of approximately 7.0 and  a
deviation  of 0.1 pH unit from the norm may result in eye irritation for
the swimmer.  Appreciable irritation will cause severe pain.
                                  66

-------
                              SECTION VII

                    CONTROL AND TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY

                                SUMMARY

The wasteload discharged from the meat  packing  industry  to  receiving
streams  can  be  reduced  to  desired levels, including no discharge of
pollutants, by conscientious  waste  water  management,  in-plant  waste
controls,  process  revisions, and by the use of primary, secondary, and
tertiary waste water treatment.  Figure 11 is a schematic of a suggested
waste reduction program for the meat packing industry  to  achieve  high
removal of pollutants in subsequent treatment.

This  section describes many of the techniques and technologies that are
available or that are being developed to achieve the various  levels  of
waste reduction.  In-plant control techniques and waste water management
suggestions  are  described  first.  Waste treatment technology normally
employed as a primary treatment is then described.  In the case  of  the
meat  packing  industry this "primary" treatment is a materials recovery
process, and is considered as part of the in-plant system, although many
of these systems have been improved  for  reducing  pollutional  levels.
The  effluent  from  these  processes  is  considered  the  "raw waste".
Secondary treatment systems, which are employed in the treatment of  the
raw waste, are presented with a description of the process, the specific
advantages  and  disadvantages  of each system, and the effectiveness on
specific waste water contaminants found in  packing  plant  waste.   The
tertiary and advanced treatment systems that are applicable to the waste
from  typical  packing  plants  are  described  in the last part of this
section.  Some of these advanced treatment systems have not been used in
full scale on meat  packing  plant  waste;  therefore,  the  development
status,  reliability,  and  potential  problems are discussed in greater
detail than for the primary and secondary treatment systems which are in
widespread use.


                      IN-PLANT CONTROL TECHNIQUES

The wasteload from a meat packing plant is composed  of  a  waste  water
stream  containing  the various pollutants described in Section VI.  The
cost and effectiveness of treatment of the waste stream will  vary  with
the  quantity  of  water  and  the  wasteload.  In fact, as indicated in
Section V, the pollutional wasteload increases as water  use  increases.
In-plant  control  techniques will reduce both water use and pollutional
wasteload.  The latter will be reduced directly by minimizing the  entry
                                  67

-------
of   solids   into the waste water stream and  indirectly by  reducing water
use.

The  in-plant control  techniques  described   below   have   been  used  in
packing plants or  have been demonstrated as.  technically feasible.
   Waste Seduction
    Technique^
   Haste jteductign
     Effect
     Pglnt_.of
    Application
                      Figure 11.  Suggested Heat Packing Industry Waste Reduction Program
                                        68

-------
                               Pen Wastes

The  best  livestock  holding pens are covered and dry cleaned with only
periodic washdown as required by Department of Agriculture  regulations.
Bedding  material  and  manure  are  readily disposed of on farm land as
fertilizer.  A separate sewer and manure pit  are  provided  for  liquid
wastes  from the pens; disposal is on land or to the secondary treatment
system.  Drinking water in the pens is  minimized  and  based  on  need.
Watering troughs should have automatic level controls.


                             Blood Handling

In  good  practice,  blood  is  not  sewered.   Blood  is almost totally
contained and collected in a blood collection system.   Water  or  steam
are  not necessary to operate such a system, and both should be avoided.
After dry cleaning the floors and  walls  exposed  to  blood  flows  and
splashing,  a  first water wash, using a minimum amount of water, can be
drained into the blood collection system. l8  Bloodwater can be  avoided
by  installing  a blood dryer.  If a plant handles bloodwater, it should
not be sewered, but can be rendered, evaporated, or  mixed  with .paunch
and  cooked  to  produce a feed material. 18 Blood drying in direct feed
dryers for use as a feed material has been demonstrated on a full scale.
*° Blood collection by a vacuum system may  be  a  feasible  process  if
markets  for edible blood develop.  Very limited amounts of edible blood
are  collected  for  Pharmaceuticals.   In   general,   improved   blood
collection  methods  need  to  be developed to match the high production
rate of American plants.


                                 Paunch

The use of water in the initial dumping of paunch material or in pumping
it must be discontinued.  Dumping the entire paunch contents  (including
the  liquid)   for  disposal or treatment without sewering, followed by a
high pressure but minimal water rinse of the paunch  will  minimize  the
pollutional wasteload from this operation.  Consideration should also be
given  to vacuuming out the residual material instead of washing it out.
In each case the economics of recovery of the paunch  and  cost  of  the
resulting  waste  treatment  should  be  examined and compared to direct
rendering of the paunch, as is.

Liquids screened from  the  paunch  material  should  be  collected  and
evaporated  or  rendered,  not wasted.  Plants that presently slurry the
paunch with water for pumping should either install  a  solids  handling
pump,  thus avoiding the need for a water slurry, or devise an alternate
                                  69

-------
handling technique;
rendering.
transporting the  entire  unopened  paunch  to
                            Viscera Handling

The  production  necessity of the inedible hashing and washing operation
is subject to conjecture.  Inedible  viscera  can  be  rendered  without
washing.   A  good  quality  grease  may  be obtained if the washings of
edible viscera (i.e., chitterlings)  are collected in a  catch  basin  in
the  immediate area before sewering. 10  The grease and solids wasteload
from the viscera can be commensurately reduced through  such  by-product
recovery  techniques.   Caustic  washings  from  any  viscera processing
should be segregated before sewering to minimize  grease  saponification
and to avoid a high pH in the waste water.
                                Troughs

Troughs  have  been  installed under the killing floor carcass conveying
line to keep as much blood,  trimmings,  bone  dust,  and  miscellaneous
pieces  off  the  floor  as  possible.   The  troughs  have  proven very
effective in collecting and containing solids, blood, etc.,  that  under
ordinary  circumstances  would  have ended up in the sewer.  Substantial
wasteload reductions are evident in  the  plants  using  these  troughs.
Variations in animal size may be a problem; however, if large variations
are  rare,  some accomodation should be possible.  A squeegee or scraper
shaped to fit the trough is used  in  clean-up  to  move  all  collected
materials to the inedible rendering system.


                               Rendering

Both  wet  and  dry  rendering are used for edible, as well as inedible,
rendering processes; although the trend is  toward  dry  rendering.   In
processing lard, low- or medium-temperature continuous rendering systems
are  common.   The water centrifuged from this process can be sold as 50
to 60 percent edible "stickwater" and thus should be evaporated and  not
discharged to the sewer.

In  dry  rendering, sprays are commonly used to condense the vapors.  In
inedible dry rendering, catch-basin effluent can be reused as  condenser
water.   In edible dry rendering, the vapors are commonly condensed with
fresh water.  A direct heat exchanger can be used to condense the vapors
without increasing waste water volumes/

In wet rendering, the greases are drawn off the top of  the  tank,  then
the  water  phase   (tankwater)  is  removed.   This tankwater has a BOD5
                                  70

-------
ranging from 22,000 mg/1 to as high as 45,000 mg/1 and suspended  solids
as  high as 2 percent.  Under no circumstances can this type of waste be
discharged to the sewer.  It must be evaporated  and  the  end  product,
commonly  called  stick  or stickwater, is -then blended into animal feed
materials.  The tankwater may, also, be  dried  directly  with  inedible
solids in a dry rendering tank.  The bottom sludge from wet rendering is
pressed  for  recovery  of  residual  grease,  and  the remaining solids
(cracklings)  are used as edible product from edible  rendering,  and  as
animal feed ingredient from inedible rendering.

Even if the tankwater is evaporated, pollution can occur.  Triple-effect
vacuum  evaporators  can  readily  foam  over, further contaminating the
waste water.


                            Hide Processing

An overflow of water from the hide curing vat or raceway occurs  because
water  is  added  to  the curing solution and because hides dehydrate as
they take on salt.  This  overflow  could  be  contained  and  collected
separately,  allowing  a more intensive treatment, at a reasonable cost,
to achieve a higher  quality  effluent,  especially  in  terms  of  salt
concentrations.    It  is  especially  important  to  dump  the  raceway
infrequently—perhaps only annually.  When dumped, it should be  drained
gradually,  over a period of 24 hours or more, to avoid an extreme shock
load on the treatment system.  The life of the solution can be  extended
by pumping it over a static or vibrating screen.


                               Scald Tank

The  hog  scald tank contains settled solids and waste water with a high
wasteload.  Collection, treatment, and reuse of  this  water  should  be
considered.  Slow drainage of the tank will reduce any shock load on the
waste  treatment  system  and  should  be  standard practice.  Provision
should be made for the removal of the solids through the bottom  of  the
tank to a truck for land disposal.


                      Pickle and Curing Solutions

These  solutions are high in salt content and, in many curing solutions,
high in sugar content.  Salt is a  difficult  pollutant  to  remove  and
sugar  has  a  very  high  BODS.   The operations involving injection or
soaking of meat products  in  these  solutions  should  be  equipped  to
collect  all  of the solution presently wasted.  The collection pans and
equipment should be designed to permit reuse of these solutions. 10,17
                                  71

-------
                      Water Conservation Practices

The following practices and equipment should be employed to  reduce  the
water   consumption   in  plants  with  coincidental  reduction  of  the
pollutional wasteload: »o,i?

    1.   Replace all drilled spray pipe systems with spray nozzles
         designed and located to provide a desired water spray
         patt ern.

    2.   Replace all washwater valves with squeeze- or press-to-
         open valves wherever possible.  Foot- or knee-operated
         valve control is useful where operator fatique is a
         problem or where the operation requires the operator
         to work with both hands.

    3.   Install foot-pedal operated handwashing and drinking
         fountain water valves to eliminate constantly running
         water.

    U.   Install automatic control for sprays which need to
         operate only about 50 percent of the time.

    5.   Product chillers using cold water may be economically
         replaced by chillers using a cryogenic liquid such as
         nitrogen, thus reducing water consumption and perhaps
         improving product quality.

    6.    The boiler blowdown is potentially reusable and
         should be considered for use in clean-up or in the plant
         laundry.  Detergent use will be reduced as well as water
         conserved.

    7.   Plant clean-up as an operating procedure consumes a
         substantial quantity of water in most plants.  Reduced
         water use can be achieved with equipment such as high
         pressure water spray systems, steam and water mix
         spray systems, or automated clean-in-place  (CIP) systems.
         Management control is particularly vital in clean-up
         operations if water is to be conserved and cleanliness
         standards are to be maintained.

    8.   Whenever possible, water should be reused in lower
         quality needs.  Examples include carcass washwater
         reused for hog dehairing, and lagoon water reused for
         cooling.  The general axiom is:  use the lowest quality
         of water satisfactory for the process.
                                   72

-------
                          Clean-Up Operations

In addition to water conservation practices, other steps can,  also,  be
taken  to reduce the wasteload from clean-up:  floors and other surfaces
should be dry squeegeed or scraped wherever feasible, to keep a  maximum
amount  of  solids  and  grease  out of the waste water;  pull the drain
basket only after cleanup has been completed;  use the minimum of  water
and  detergent, consistent with cleaning requirements,  and automate the
cleaning of conveyors, piping and other equipment.
                                  73

-------
                       JN-PLANT_PBIMARY_TREATMENT

                           Flow Equalization

Equalization facilities consist of a holding tank and pumping  equipment
designed  to  reduce  the  fluctuations  of  waste streams.  They can be
economically advantageous whether  the  industry  is  treating  its  own
wastes  or  discharging  into a city sewer after some pretreatment.  The
equalizing tank will store waste water either for recycle or reuse or to
feed the flow uniformly to treatment facilities  throughout  the  24hour
day.   The  tank  is characterized by a varying flow into the tank and a
constant flow out.

The major advantages of  equalization  for  the  meat  packer  are  that
treatment systems can be smaller, since they can be designed for the 24-
hour  average  rather than the peak flows, and secondary waste treatment
systems  operate  much  better  when  not  subjected  to  shockloads  or
variations on feed rate.
                                screens

Since  so  much of the pollutional matter in meat wastes is originally a
solid  (meat particles and fat) or sludge (manure  solids),  interception
of  the  waste  material  by various types of screens is a natural first
step.  To assure best operation for application to the plant waste water
stream, a flow equalization facility should precede it.

Unfortunately, when these pollutional materials enter  the  sewage  flow
and are subjected to turbulence, pumping, and mechanical screening, they
break  down  and  release soluble BODS to the flow, along with colloidal
and suspended and grease solids.  Waste treatment—that is, the  removal
of soluble, colloidal and suspended organic matter—is expensive.  It is
far  simpler  and  less  expensive  to  keep the solids out of the sewer
entirely.

Static, vibrating, and rotary screens are the  primary  types  used  for
this  step in the in-plant primary treatment.  Whenever feasible, pilot-
scale studies are warranted before selecting a screen,  unless  specific
operating  data are available for the specific use intended, in the same
solids concentration range, and under the same operating conditions.
                                   74

-------
Static Screens

The primary function of a static screen is to remove  "free"  or  trans-
porting  fluids.   This can be accomplished in several ways and, in most
older concepts, only gravity drainage is involved.  A  concavely  curved
screen  design  using  high  velocity pressure-feeding was developed and
patented in the 1950 's for mineral classification and has  been  adapted
to other uses in the process industries.  This design employs bar inter-
ference  to the slurry which knives off thin layers of the flow over the
curved surface. l7

Beginning in 1969, United States and foreign patents were allowed  on  a
three-slope  static  screen made of specially coined curved wires.  This
concept used the Coanda or wall attachment  phenomena  to  withdraw  the
fluid from the under layer of a slurry which is stratified by controlled
velocity over the screen.  This method of operation has been found to be
highly effective in handling slurries containing fatty or sticky fibrous
suspended matter. 17

The  arrangement  of transverse wires with unique singular curves in the
sense of flow provides a relatively non-clogging surface for  dewatering
or screening.   The screens are precisely made in No. 316 stainless steel
and  are extremely rugged.  Harder, wear-resisting stainless alloys may^
also, be used for special purposes.  Openings of 0.025 to 0.15 cm (0.010
to 0.060 inches) meet normal screening needs. *7
Vibrating Screens

The effectiveness of a vibrating  screen  depends  on  a  rapid  motion.
Vibrating  screens  operate between 900 rpm and 1800 rpm; the motion can
either be circular or straight line, varying from 0.08 to 1.27 cm  (1/32
to  1/2  inch)  total  travel.  The speed and motion are selected by the
screen manufacturer for the particular application.

Of prime importance in the selection of a proper vibrating screen is the
application of the proper cloth.  The  capacities  on  liquid  vibrating
screens  are  based on the percent of open area of the cloth.  The cloth
is selected with the proper combination of strength of wire and  percent
of open area.  If the waste solids to be handled are heavy and abrasive,
wire  of  a greater thickness and diameter should be used to assure long
life.  However, if the material  is  light  or  sticky  in  nature,  the
durability  of  the screening surface may be the smallest consideration.
In such a case, a light wire may be necessary to  provide  an  increased
percent of open area.
                                  75

-------
Rotary^ Screen s

One  type  of  barrel  or  rotary  screen,  driven  by external rollers,
receives.the waste water at one open end and discharges  the  solids  at
the  other  open  end.   The  liquid  passes  outward through the screen
(usually  stainless  steel  screen  cloth  or  perforated  metal)   to  a
receiving  box  and effluent sewer mounted below the screen.  The screen
is usually sprayed continuously by means of a  line  of  external  spray
nozzles.   The  screen  is usually inclined towards the solids exit end.
This type is popular as an offal screen but has not  been  used  to  any
great  extent in secondary "polishing"—that is, in removing solids from
waste streams containing low solids concentrations.  17   (A  screen  of
this type has been developed for recycle of hide brining waters.)

Another rotary screen commonly used in the meat industry is driven by an
external  pinion  gear.  The raw flow is discharged into the interior of
the screen below center, and solids are removed in a  trough  and  screw
conveyor  mounted  lengthwise  at  the  center  line of the barrel.  The
liquid exits outward through the screen into a box in which  the  screen
is partially submerged.  The screen is usually 40 x 40 mesh, with 0.4 mm
(1/64 inch)  openings.  Perforated lift paddles mounted lengthwise on the
inside  surface  of  the  screen  assist  in  lifting  the solids to the
conveyor trough.  This type is  also  generally  sprayed  externally  to
reduce  blinding.   Grease  clogging  can be reduced by coating the wire
cloth with teflon.  Solids removals up to 82 percent are reported. 17


Applications

A broad range of applications exist for screens as the  first  stage  of
inplant primary treatment processes.  These include both the plant waste
water  and waste water discharged from individual processes.  The latter
include  paunch  manure,  hog  stomach  contents,  hog  hair   recovery,
stickwater  solids,  hide washing operations, hide curing brine recycle,
and others.


                              Catch Basins

The catch basin for the  separation  of  grease  and  solids  from  meat
packing  waste  waters  was  originally  developed to recover marketable
grease.  Since the primary object was grease recovery, all  improvements
were  centered  on  skimming.   Many catch basins were not equipped with
automatic bottom sludge removal equipment.  These basins could often  be
completely  drained  to  the  sewer  and were "sludged out" weekly or at
frequencies such that septic conditions would not cause  the  sludge  to
rise.   Rising  sludge was undesirable because it could affect the color
and reduce the market value of the grease.
                                   76

-------
In the past twenty years, with waste  treatment  gradually  becoming  an
added  economic  incentive,  catch basin design has been improved in the
solids removal area as well.  In fact, the low market value of  inedible
grease  and  tallow  has reduced concern about quality of the skimmings,
and now the concern is shifting toward overall effluent quality improve-
ment.  Gravity grease recovery systems will remove 20 to 30  percent  of
the  BODS, 40 to 50 percent of the suspended solids and 50 to 60 percent
of the grease (hexahe solubles). l7

The majority of the gravity grease recovery basins  (catch  basins)   are
rectangular.   Flow  rate is the most important criterion for design; 30
to 40 minutes detention time at one ho^r ^peak flow is  a  common  sizing
factor.  *7   The  use  of  an  equalizing tank ahead of, the catch basin
obviously minimizes the size  requirement  for  the  basin.   A  shallow
basin—up to 1.8m  (6 feet)—is preferred.

A  "skimmer11  skims  the  grease  and  scum  off the top into collecting
troughs.  A scraper moves the sludge at  the  bottom  into  a  submerged
hopper from which it can be pumped.  Both skimmings and sludge go to by-
product recovery.

Usually two identical catch basins, with a common wall, are desirable so
operation  can  continue if one is down for maintenance or repair.  Both
concrete and steel tanks are used.

Concrete tanks have the inherent advantages of lower overall maintenance
and more permanence of structure.  However, some  plants  prefer  to  be
able  to  modify  their operation for future expansion or alterations or
even relocation.

All-steel tanks have the advantage of being  semiportable,  more  easily
field-erected,  and  more easily modified than concrete tanks.  The all-
steel tanks, however, require additional maintenance as a result of wear
from abrasion,

A tank using all-steel walls and concrete bottom is  probably  the  best
compromise  between  the  all-steel tank and the all-concrete tank.   The
advantages are the same  as  for  steel;  however,  the  all-steel  tank
requires  a  footing  underneath  the  supporting  members, whereas, the
concrete bottom forms the floor and supporting footings  for  the  steel
wall tank.
                        Dissolved Air Flotation
As  a  materials  recovery concept, dissolved air flotation is  actually
functioning to treat wastes.
                                  77

-------
However within the context of this report, therefore, the effluent  from
a  dissolved  air flotation system is considered raw waste.   This system
is normally used to remove fine suspended  solids  and  is  particularly
effective on grease in waste waters from meat packing plants.   This is a
relatively  recent  technology  in  the meat industry; however, it is in
fairly widespread use and increasing numbers of  plants  are  installing
these systems.

Dissolved  air  flotation appears to be the single most effective device
that a  meat  packing  plant  can  install  to  reduce  the  pollutional
wasteload  in  its  waste  water stream.  It is expected that the use of
dissolved air flotation will become standard practice in  the  industry,
especially as a step in achieving the 1977 or 1983 standards.


Technical Description

Air  flotation  systems  are  used to remove any suspended material from
waste water with a  specific  gravity  close  to  that  of  water.   The
dissolved  air system generates a supersaturated solution of waste water
and compressed air by raising the pressure of the waste water stream  to
that  of  the  compressed  air, then mixing the two in a detention tank.
This supersaturated mixture of air and waste  water  flows  to  a  large
flotation  tank  where  the  pressure  is  released,  thereby generating
numerous small air bubbles which effect the flotation of  the  suspended
organic  material  by  one  of three mechanisms:  1) adhesion of the air
bubles to the particles of matter;  2)  trapping of the  air  bubbles  in
the  floe  structures  of  suspended  material  as  the bubbles rise; 3)
adsorption of the air bubbles as the floe structure is formed  from  the
suspended  organic  matter.  *8   In  most  cases, bottom sludge removal
facilities are also provided.

There are three process alternatives varying  by  the  degree  of  waste
water  that  is  pressurized and into which the compressed air is mixed.
In the total pressurization process. Figure 12, the entire  waste  water
stream  is  raised  to  full  pressure for compressed air injection.  In
partial pressurization. Figure 13, only a part of the waste water stream
is raised to the pressure of the compressed air for  subsequent  mixing.
In  the  recycle  pressurization  process  (Alternative B of Figure 13),
treated effluent from the flotation tank is recycled and pressurized for
mixing with the compressed air  and  then,  at  the  point  of  pressure
release,  is mixed with the influent waste water.  Alternative A  (Figure
13) shows a side-stream of influent entering the  detention  tank,  thus
reducing  the  pumping  required  in  the  system  shown  in  Figure 12.
Operating costs may vary slightly, but performance should be essentially
equal among the alternatives.
                                  78

-------
Feed
        Compressed
            Air
Total   Pressurizotion

       Process
                                                            Float to
                                                             Disposal
                                                      Sludge to
                                                      Disposal
                Figure 12.  Dissolved Air Flotation

-------
                                                 Compressed
                                                     Air
                                                   r
                            Recycle  Pressurizotion
                                   Process
                                (Alternative B)
     Feed  from
oo      Primary
0     Treatment
1 \
1
1
1
! T '
^_^
Flotation
Tank
1
1
I
>
	 1 Cl«
                       i __   Retention
                               Tank
                                                                                       Treated
                                    v
                                  Sludge to
                                   Disposal
                                          Float  to
                                           Disposal
                   Compressed
                       Air
Partial Pressurizotion
      Process
   (Alternative A)
                        Figure 13.   Process Alternatives for Dissolved Air Flotation

-------
Improved  performanc e  of  the  air  flotat ion  system  i s  achieved  by
coagulation of the suspended matter prior to treatment.   This is done by
pH adjustment or the addition of coagulant chemicals, or both.  Aluminum
sulfate, iron sulfate, lime, and polyelectrolytes are used as coagulants
at varying concentrations up to 300 to 400 mg/1 in the raw waste.  These
chemicals  are  essentially  totally  removed in the dissolved air unit,
thereby adding little or no  load  to  the  downstream  waste  treatment
systems.  Chemical precipitation is also discussed later, particulary in
regard  to  phosphorus removal, under tertiary treatment; phosphorus can
also be removed at this primary  (in-plant)  treatment  stage.   A  slow
paddle  mix  will  improve  coagulation.  It has been suggested that the
proteinaceous matter in meat packing plant waste  could  be  removed  by
reducing  the  waste  water to the isoelectric pH range of about 3.5. l9
The protein material would be  coagulated  at  that  point  and  readily
removed  as  float  from  the  top of the dissolved air unit.  This is a
typical practice in the meat  industry  in  the  United  States  at  the
present

However, a somewhat comparable practice involving by-product recovery is
gaining  acceptance.   In  this  system,  segregated sewers are required
along with two stages of air flotation treatment of the waste waters.  A
good quality grease product can be recovered from a grease-bearing waste
water without the addition of  chemicals  in  the  first  dissolved  air
system.   The  effluent  from the first dissolved air unit is mixed with
effluent from the other waste streams in the plant and this  is  fed  to
the  second  dissolved  air  unit which may or may not include chemicals
addition, as mentioned above.

One of the manufacturers of dissolved air flotation equipment  indicated
a  60  percent  suspended  solids  removal  and  80 to 90 percent grease
removal without the addition of chemicals.  With the addition of 300  to
400 mg/1 of inorganic coagulants and a slow mix to coagulate the organic
matter,  the  manufacturer says that 90 percent or more o£ the suspended
solids can be removed and more than 90 percent of the grease.  2°  Total
nitrogen  is  also  reduced  as  exemplified  by  the 35 to 70 reduction
efficiencies for the air flotation units for which data  we're  available
for this study.

North Star's staff observed the operation of several' dissolved air units
during  the  verification  sampling program and other plant visits.  One
plant that was visited controlled the feed rate  and  pH  of  the  waste
water and achieve^ 90 to 95 percent removal of solids and grease,  other
plants  had  relatively gcod operating success, but some did not achieve
the results that should have been attainable.  It appeared that they did
not fully understand the process  chemistry  and  were  using  erroneous
operating procedures.

The Alwatec process has been developed by a company in Oslo, Norway, and
uses  a  lignosulfonic  acid  precipitation and dissolved air flotation.
                                   81

-------
recovering a high protein product that is valuable as a feed. 21  Nearly
instantaneous  protein  precipitation  and  hence,  nitrogen  removal is
achieved when high protein-containing effluent, such as that from a meat
packing plant, is acidified to a pH between 3 and 4, and high  molecular
weight   fully   sulphonated  sodium  lignosulphonate  is  added.   BOD5
reduction is reported to range from 60 to 95 percent and  the  recovered
protein  material leads to a reduction of nitrogen in the effluent of 85
to 90 percent  The effluent must be neutralized before further treatment
by the addition of milk of lime or some other inexpensive alkali.   This
process  is  being  evaluated  on meat packing waste in one plant in the
United States at the present time.

Problems and Reliability

The reliability of the  dissolved  air  flotation  process  and  of  the
equipment  seems  to  be well established, although it is relatively new
technology for the  meat  packing  industry.   As  indicated  above,  it
appears  that the use of the dissolved air system is not fully exploited
by some of the companies who have installed them for waste water  treat-
ment.   The  potential  reliability  of the dissolved air process can be
realized by proper  installation  and  operation.   The  feed  rate  and
process  conditions must be maintained at the proper levels at all times
to assure this reliability.   This  fact  does  not  seem  to  be  fully
understood  or  of  sufficient  concern to some companies, and thus full
benefit is frequently not achieved.

The sludge and float taken from the dissolved air system can be disposed
of with the sludges obtained from  secondary  waste  treatment  systems.
The  addition  of  polyelectrolyte chemicals was reported to create some
problems for sludge dewatering; however, this may have been  the  unique
experience  of one or two meat packing plants.  The mechanical equipment
involved in  the  dissolved  air  flotation  system  is  fairly  simple,
requiring  standard  maintenance  attention for such things as pumps and
mechanical drives.


                BIOLOGICAL WASTIWATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS

The biolpgical treatment methods commonly used for the treatment of meat
packing wastes after in-plant primary treatment  (solids removal) are the
following biological  systems;  anaerobic  processes,  aerobic  lagoons,
variations  of  the  activated  sludge  process, and high-rate trickling
filters.  Based' on operational  data  from  a  pilot-plant  system,  the
rotating  biological  contactor shows potential as a secondary treatment
system.  Several of these systems are capable  of  providing  70  to  97
percent BOD5 reductions and 80 to 95 percent suspended solids reduction,
while  combinations of these systems can achieve reductions greater than
99 percent in BODS and grease, and greater than 97 percent in  suspended
solids.
                                   82

-------
The  selection  of  a  secondary biological system for treatment of meat
packing   wastes   depends   upon   a   number   of   important   system
characteristics.   Some of these are waste water volume, equipment used,
pollutant reduction effectiveness  required,  reliability,  consistency,
and  resulting  secondary  pollution problems (e.g., sludge disposal and
odor control).  Nevertheless, the highly biodegradable character of  the
wastes  from  meat  packing and slaughtering operations makes biological
treatment an attractive, reasonable  alternative  which  will  discharge
well-treated  effluents without dependence upon influent concentrations.
The characteristics and performance  of  each  of  the  above  mentioned
secondary  treatment  systems, and, for common combinations of them, are
described below.  Capital and operating costs are discussed  in  Section
VIII.   Since  the  treatment  of  wastes  does  not differ for the four
subcategories  of  the  meat  packing  industry  (see  Section  IV) ,  no
distinction by subcategory is made in the following discussion.


                          Anaerobic Processes

Two  types  of  anaerobic  processes  are  used:   anaerobic lagoons and
anaerobic contact systems.  Elevated temperatures (29° to 35°C or 85° to
95°F) and the high concentrations of carbohydrates, fats, proteins,   and
nutrients  typically found in meat packing wastes make these wastes well
suited to anaerobic treatment.  Anaerobic_or faculative  microorganisms,
which  function  in  the  absence  of  dissolved  oxygen, break down the
organic wastes to intermediates such  as  organic  acids, and  alcohols.
Methane  bacteria  then  convert  the  intermediates primarily to carbon
dioxide and  methane.    Unfortunately,  much  of  the  organic  nitrogen
present  in  the  influent  is  converted to ammonia nitrogen.  Also, if
sulfur compounds are present (such as from high-sulfate raw water—50 to
100 mg/1 sulfate)  hydrogen sulfide will be generated or acid  conditions
will  develop  which  suppress  methane  production' and  create  odors.
because they provide high overall removal of BODS and  suspended  solids
anaerobic  processes  are  economical  with  no  power  cost (other than
pumping) and with low land requirements.

                                                               j
Anaerobic Lagoons

Anaerobic lagoons are widely used in the industry as the first  step  in
secondary treatment or as pretreatment prior to discharge to a municipal
system.   Reductions of up to 97 percent in BODS and up to 95 percent in»
suspended solids can be achieved with the lagoons;  85 percent  reduction
in  BODJ5  is  common.    A  usual arrangement is two anaerobic lagoons in
parallel, although occasionally two are used in series.   These  lagoons
are  relatively  deep  (3  to  5  meters,  or  about 10 to 17 feet), low
surface-area systems with typical  waste  loadings  of  240  to  320  kg
BOD5/1000  cubic  meters  (15  to  20  Ib  BOBS/1000  cubic  feet)  and a
detention time of five to ten days.  A thick scum layer  of  grease  and
                                  83

-------
paunch  manure is frequently allowed to accumulate on the surface of the
lagoon  to  retard  heat  loss,  to  ensure  anaerobic  conditions,  and
hopefully  to  retain  obnoxious  odors.   Low pH and wind can adversely
affect the scum layer,                                            ;

Plastic covers of  nylon-reinforced  Hypalon,  polyvinyl  chloride,  and
styrofoam have been uaed on occasion in place of the scum layer; in fact
some   states   require  this.   Properly  installed  covers  provide  a
convenient means for odor control and collection of methane gas.

Influent waste water flow should be near, but not on* the bottom of  the
lagoon.   In  some  installations, sludge is recycled to ensure adequate
anaerobic seed for the influent.  The effluent from the lagoon should be
located to prevent short-circuiting the flow and carry-over of the  scum
layer.   For  best  operation, the pH should be between 7.0 and 8.5.  At
lower pH, methane-forming bacteria will not survive and the acid formers
will take over to produce very noxious odors.  At a high pH (above 8,5),
acid forming bacteria will be suppressed to lower the lagoon efficiency.


Advantages-Pisadvantages. Advantages of an anaerobic lagoon  system  are
initial  low  cost,  ease  of operation, and the ability to handle large
grease loads and shock waste  loads,  and  yet  continue  to  provide  a
consistent quality effluent.21  Disadvantages of an anaerobic lagoon are
the  hydrogen  sulfide  generated from suifated waters and the typically
high ammonia concentrations in the effluent of 100  mg/1  or  more.   If
acid  conditions  develop,  sever  odor  problems  result.  If the gases
evolved are contained, it is possible to  use  iron  filings  to  remove
sulfides.


Application.  Anaerobic  lagoons  used  as  the first stage in secondary
treatment are usually followed by aerobic  lagoons.   Placing  a  small,
mechanically aerated lagoon between the anaerobic and aerobic lagoons is
becoming  popular.  A number of plants are currently installing extended
aeration units following the anaerobic lagoons to obtain  nitrification.
Anaerobic  lagoons  are  not permitted in some states or areas where the
gound water is high or  the  soil  conditions  are  adverse   (e.g.,  too
porous), or because of odor problems.
                                  84

-------
Anaerobic Contact System

The  anaerobic  contact system requires far more equipment for operation
than do anaerobic lagoons, and consequently is  not  as  commonly  used.
The  equipment,  as  illustrated  .in Figure 14, consists of equalization
tanks, digesters with mixing equipment,  air  or  vacuum  gas  stripping
units, and sedimentation tanks (clari-fiers). f Overall reduction of 90 to
97 percent in BODS and suspended solids is achievable.

Equalized  waste  water  flow  is introduced into a mixed digester where
anaerobic decomposition takes place at a temperature  of  about  33°  to
35°C (90° to 95°F),  BOD5 loadings into the digester are between 2.4 and
3.2 kg/cubic meter  (0.15 and 0.20 Ib/cubic foot), and the detention time
is  between  three  and twelve hours.  After gas stripping, the digester
effluent is clarified and sludge is recycled at a rate of about onethird
the raw waste influent rate.  Sludge at the rate of about 2  percent  of
the raw waste volume is removed from the system.7


Advantages-Disadvantages.   Advantages  of  the anaerobic contact system
are high organic waste  load  reduction  in  a  relatively  short  time;
production  and collection of methane gas that can be used to maintain a
high temperature in the digester and,  to  provide  auxiliary  heat  and
power;  good  effluent  stability  to  grease  and wasteload shocks; and
application in areas where anaerobic lagoons cannot be used  because  of
odor  or  soil  conditions.   Disadvantages  of anaerobic contactors are
higher initial and maintenance costs and some  odors  emitted  from  the
clarifiers.


Applications.   Anaerobic  contact  systems are restricted to use as the
first stage of secondary treatment and  can  be  followed  by  the  same
systems   following  anaerobic  lagoons  or  trickling  filter  roughing
systems.


                            Aerated Lagoons

Aerated lagoons have been used successfully for many years in a  limited
number of installations for treating meat packing wastes.  However, with
recent  tightening of effluent limitations and because of the additional
treatment aerated lagoons can provide, the number  of  installations  is
increasing.

Aerated  lagoons  use  either  fixed'" mechanical  turbine-type aerators,
floating propeller-type aerators, or a diffused air system for supplying
oxygen to the waste water.  The lagoons usually are 2.4 to 4,6 m  (8  to
15  feet)   deep,  and  have  a  detention time of two to ten days.  BODS
reductions range from 40 to 60 percent with little or  no  reduction  in
                                  85

-------
suspended  solids.  Because of this, aerated lagoons approach conditions
similar to extended aeration without sludge recycle (see below).


Advantages-Disadvantages

Advantages of this system are that it can rapidly add  dissolved  oxygen
(DO)   to  convert  anaerobic  waste  waters to an aerobic state;  provide
additional BOD5 reduction; and require  a  relatively  small  amount  of
land.   Disadvantages  are  the  power requirements and that the aerated
lagoon, in itself, usually does not reduce  BODS  and  suspended  solids
adequately to be used as the final stage in a high performance secondary
system.


Applications

Aerated  lagoons are usually the second stage of secondary treatment and
must be followed by an aerobic  (shallow)  lagoon  to  capture  residual
suspended solids and to provide additional treatment.


                            Aerobic Lagoons

Aerobic  lagoons  (or stabilization lagoons or oxidation ponds) are large
surface area, shallow lagoons, usually 1 to 2*3 m  (3 to  8  feet)  deep,
loaded at a BODS rate of 20 to 50 pounds per acre.  Detention times will
vary  from about one month to six or seven months; thus, aerobic lagoons
require large areas of land.

Aerobic lagoons serve three main functions in waste reduction:

    o    Allow solids to settle out;

    o    Equalize and control flow;

    o    Permit stabilization of organic matter'by aerobic and
         facultative microorganisms and, also, by algae.

Actually, if the pond is quite deep, 1.8 to 2.U m  (6 to 8 feet), so that
the waste water near the bottom is void of dissolved  oxygen,  anaerobic
Organisms  may  be present.  Therefore, settled solids can be decomposed
into  inert  and  soluble  organic  matter  by  aerobic,  anaerobic   or
facultative  organisms,  depending  upon  the  lagoon  conditions.   The
soluble organic matter is, also, decomposed by  microorganisms.   It  is
essential  to  maintain aerobic conditions in at least the upper 6 to 12
Inches in shallow lagoons since aerobic microorganisms  cause  the  most
complete  oxidation  of organic matter.  Wind action assists in carrying
the upper layer of liquid  (aerated by  air-water  interface  and  photo-
                                   86

-------
synthesis)  down  into the deeper portions.  The anaerobic decomposition
generally occuring in the bottom  converts  solids  to  ligujid  organics
which can become nutrients for the aerobic organisms in the upper zone,

Algae  growth is common in aerobic lagoons; this currently is a drawback
when aerobic lagoons are used for final  treatment.   Algae  may  escape
into  the  receiving waters, and the algae added to receiving waters are
considered a pollutant.  Algae in the lagoon, however, play an important
role in stabilization.  They use CO2,  sulfates,  nitrates,  phosphates,
water  and  sunlight to synthesize their own organic cellular matter and
give  off  free  oxygen.   The  oxygen  may  then  be  used   by   other
microorganisms  for  their metabolic processes.  However, when algae die
they release their organic matter in the  lagoon,  causing  a  secondary
loading.  Lagoon discharge pipes located about 30 cm or 1 foot below the
lagoon surface will help reduce the algae content in the effluent.

From  some of the data used in this study ammonia was found to dissipate
without the coincident appearance of an equivalent amount of nitrite and
nitrate in aerobic lagoons.   From  this,  and  the  fact  that  aerobic
lagoons  have  a  known tendency to become anaerobic near the bottom, it
appears that some denitrification is occurring.

Ice and snow cover in winter can reduce  the  overall  effectiveness  of
aerobic  lagoons  by  inhibiting  algae activity, preventing mixing, and
preventing reaeration by wind action  and  diffusion.   This  cover,  if
present  for  an  extended  period,  can result in anaerobic conditions.
However, most of these difficulties can  be  substantially  overcome  by
providing for increased detention time in initial design (up to 90 days)
by   installing  additional  aerobic  chambers  and/or  using  submerged
diffused aerators.  A further dampening of ambiant climate conditions is
achieved when raw effluents have  an  elevated  temperature  which  will
persist  through  much  of  a biological treatment system and thus deter
freezing.  When there is no ice and snow cover on large aerobic lagoons,
high winds can develop a strong  wave  action  that  can  damage  dikes.
Riprap,  segmented  lagoons,  and  finger dikes are used to prevent wave
damage.  Finger dikes, when arranged appropriately, also, prevent  short
circuiting  of  the  waste  water  through  the lagoon.  Rodent and weed
control, and dike maintenance are all essential for  good  operation  of
the lagoons.


Advantages-Disadvantages

Advantages of aerobic lagoons are that they reduce suspended solids, and
colloidal  matter  remaining  in  aerated  chamber  or  anaerobic lagoon
effluents, oxidize organic matter, permit flow control and  waste  water
storage.  Disadavantages are reduced effectiveness during winter months,
the large land requirements, the algae growth problem, ineffectiveness
                                  87

-------
                  Equolizing Tank
co       Plant
      Effluent
                               Heaters
Sludge  Recycle
                                           Anaerobic
                                           Digesters
           Gas
         Stripping
           Units
Sedimentation
    Tanks
                                           Effluent
                                   Figure 14.  Anaerobic Contact Process

-------
in  eliminating  residual  grease, and odor problems for a short time in
spring, after the ice melts and before the lagoon becomes aerobic again.

Applications

Aerobic lagoons usually are the last stage in  secondary  treatment  and
frequently follow anaerobic or anaerobic-aerated lagoons.  Large aerobic
lagoons  allow plants to store waste waters for discharge during periods
of high flow in the receiving body of water or to store  for  irrigation
purposes  during  the summer.  These lagoons are particularly popular in
rural areas where land is available and relatively inexpensive.


                            Activated Sludge

The conventional activated sludge  process  is  schematically  shown  in
Figure  15.  In this process recycled biologically active sludge or floe
is  mixed  in  aerated  tanks  or  basins  with   waste   waters.    The
microorganisms  in  the  floe  adsorb organic matter from the wastes and
convert it by oxidation-enzyme systems to such stable products as carbon
dioxide, water, and sometimes nitrates and sulfates.  The time  required
for  digestion  depends  on the type of waste and its concentration, but
the average time is six hours.  The floe, which is a mixture  of  micro-
organisms  (bacteria,  protozoa, and filamentous types), food, and slime
material, can assimilate organic matter rapidly when properly activated;
hence, the name activated sludge.

From the aeration tank the mixed liquor waste waters,  in .which  little
nitrification  has  taken place, are discharged to a sedimentation tank.
Here the sludge settles out, producing a clear effluent, low in BODS,
and a biologically active sludge.  A  portion  of  the  settled  sludge,
normally  about  20  percent, is recycled to serve as an inoculum and to
maintain a high mixed liquor suspended solids content.  Excess sludge is
removed (wasted)  from the system, usually to  thickeners  and  anaerobic
digestion,  or  to  chemical  treatment  and dewatering by filtration or
centrifugation.

This conventional activated sludge process can reduce BODS and suspended
solids up to 95 percent.  However, because it cannot readily handle  the
shock loads and widely varying flow common to meat packing waste waters,
this  particular  version  of  activated  sludge  is not a commonly used
process for treating meat packing wastes.

Various  modifications  of  the  activated  sludge  process  have   been
developed,   such  as  the  tapered  aeration,  step  aeration,  contact
stabilization, and  extended  aeration.   Of  these,  extended  aeration
processes are being used for treatment of meat packing wastes.
                                   89

-------

-------
00
                               Primary
                            Sedimentation
  Secondary
Sedimentation
                    Raw
                   Waste
Aeration  Tank
                                          j_Return  Activated Sludge
                                  . Waste
                                    Sludge
        I
 Waste I
Sludge^
                 Effluent
                                  Figure 15.  Activated Sludge Process

-------
Extended Aeration

The  extended  aeration process is similar to the conventional activated
sludge process, except that the mixture  of  activated  sludge  and  raw
waste  water is maintained in the aeration chamber for longer periods of
time.  The common detention time in extended aeration is  one  to  three
days,  rather than six hours.  During this prolonged contact between the
sludge and raw waste, there is ample time for the organic matter  to  be
adsorbed  by  the  sludge  and  also for the organisms to metabolize the
organic matter which they have adsorbed.  This allows for a much greater
removal of  organic  matter.   In  addition,  the  organisms  undergo  a
considerable  amount  of endogenous respiration; therefore, oxidize much
of the organic matter which has been built up into the protoplasm of the
organism.  Hence, in addition to high organic removals  from  the  waste
waters,  up to 75 percent of the organic matter of the microorganisms is
decomposed into stable products and consequently less sludge  will  have
to be handled.

In  extended  aeration, as in the conventional activated sludge process,
it is necessary to have a final sedimentation tank.  Some of the  solids
resulting   from  extended  aeration  are  rather  finely  divided  and,
therefore, settle slowly, requiring a longer period of settling.

The long detention time in the extended aeration tank makes it  possible
for  nitrification to occur.  In nitrification under aerobic conditions,
ammonia is converted to nitrites and  nitrates  by  specific  groups  of
nitrifying  bacteria.  For this to occur, it is necessary to have sludge
detention times in excess of ten days.21  This can  be  accomplished  by
regulating  the  amounts of sludge recycled and wasted each day.  Oxygen
enriched gas could be used in place of air  in  the  aeration  tanks  to
improve  overall performance.  This would require that the aeration tank
be partitioned and covered, and that the air compressor  and  dispersion
system be replaced by a rotating sparger system, which costs less to buy
and  operate.  When cocurrent, staged flow and recirculation of gas back
through the liquor is employed, between 90 and 95 percent oxygen use  is
claimed.22  Although this modification of extended aeration has not been
used  in treating meat packing wastes, it is being used successfully for
treating other wastes.


Advantages and Disadvantages

The advantages of the extended aeration process are that it is stable to
shock loading and flow fluctuations because the incoming raw waste  load
is  diluted,  by the liquid in the system, to a much greater extent than
in conventional activated sludge.  Also, because of the  long  detention
time,  high  BOD5  reductions  can be obtained.  Other advantages of the
system are  the  elimination  of  sludge  digestion  equipment  and  the
capability  to  produce a nitrified effluent.  Disadvantages are that it
                                  90

-------
is difficult to remove most of  the  suspended  solids  from  the  mixed
liquor  discharged  from the aeration tank; large volume tanks or basins
are required to accommodate the  long  detention  times;  and  operating
costs for aeration are high.


Applications

Because  of  the  nitrification  process,  extended aeration systems are
being used following anaerobic lagoons  to  produce  low  BODS  and  low
ammonia-nitrogen effluents.  They are also p^ing used as the first stage
of secondary treatment followed by polishing lagoons.


                            Trickling Filter

A  trickling  filter  consists of a bed of rock or prefabricated plastic
filter media on the surface of which the  microbial  flora  develops;  a
rotary  arm  waste  water  distribution  system;  and  an under-drainage
system.  The distribution arm uniformly distributes waste water over the
filter media. The microflora adsorbs,  and  eventually  metabolizes  the
organic  matter  in  the  liquid  as it trickles down through the media.
When the growth becomes fairly thick it begins to slough off the surface
of the media as large pieces of solids which are carried with the liquid
out through the  under-drainage  system.   Consequently,  the  trickling
filter  must  be followed by an appropriate sedimentation tank to remove
the solids.  To avoid clogging the trickling  filter,  the  waste  water
must  be pre-treated (primary, in-plant treatment)  to remove most solids
and grease.

The high-rate trickling filter is used  in  treating  meat  plant  waste
waters  either  as  a roughing filter preceding a conventional secondary
treatment such as activated sludge or as complete secondary treatment in
several stages.  Hydraulic loading for high rate  trickling  filters  is
generally  in the range of 93.5 to 187 million liters per hectare (10 to
20 million gallons per acre) per day.

In treating high organic  wastes  with  trickling  filters  there  is  a
definite  limit  to BOD5 removal by a single stage.  Common practice has
been to use a multistage filter system.  The first stage filter  can  be
fed at a BOD5 rate of 0.016 to 0.024 kg/cubic meter of media (100 to 150
pounds/1000  cubic  feet)   and can result in 40 to 50 percent removal of
BOD5.  If the second stage filter is the final filter to  be  used,  the
loading should not exceed 0.4 kg BOD5/cubic meter of media (25 pounds of
BOD5  per  1000 cubic feet) of media.  However, since the raw waste load
of meat packing plants is relatively strong, this may mean that the size
of the second filter will be excessively large.  In this case, it  might
be better to provide still a third stage; then loadings can be higher in
the  second stage—up to 0,8 to 1.2 kg BOD5 per cubic meter of media (50
                                   91

-------
to 75 pounds of BOD5/1000 cubic feet of  media).   The  loading  to  the
third  stage  should  be limited to 0.32 kg of BOD5/cubic meter of media
(20 pounds/1000 cubic feet).  The overall removal of such a  system  can
be  as high as 95 percent reduction in BODS.  When staging of filters is
used, it is desirable to provide a sedimentation tank  for  each  stage.
However,  large rock or synthetic media can be used without intermediate
sedimentaton.  Because of the size of second and third stage filters and
because of the number of sedimentation tanks that may be required,  this
system  is  no  longer  generally  used  in  the  meat packing industry.
Although single-stage filters alone result  in  considerably  less  BODS
reduction  than  staged trickling filter systems, they have found use in
the meat industry, particularly as a pretreatment prior to some type  of
activated sludge system.


Advantages, and .Disadvantages

Advantages  of  the roughing trickling filter are that it can smooth out
hydraulic and BODS loadings; provide some initial reduction in BODS  (40
to  50  percent) ;  and  the  fact  that  it is not injured materially by
extended rest periods such as weekends.  However, if there are long rest
periods it is desirable to  recirculate  the  effluent  of  one  of  the
settling  tanks  through  the  filter  to  keep the floe moist.  Another
advantage of the roughing filter is its reliability  with  minimum  care
and attention.  A disadvantage of the trickling filter system in general
is that it is a costly installation, it may, also, be necessary to cover
the   filters   in   winter  to  prevent  freeze-up,  and  the  effluent
concentration fluctuates with changes in incoming wasteload.
                     Rotating Biological Contactor
Process Description
The rotating biological contactor  (RBC) consists of a series of  closely
spaced flat parallel disks which are rotated while partially immersed in
the  waste  waters  being  treated.   A  biological  growth covering the
surface of the disk adsorbs dissolved  organic  matter  present  in  the
waste  water.   As  the  biomass  on the disk builds up, excess slime is
sloughed off periodically and is removed in  sedimentation  tanks.   The
rotation  of  the  disk  carries a thin film of waste water into the air
where it  absorbs  the  oxygen  necessary  for  the  aerobic  biological
activity  of  the  biomass.   The  disk  rotation also promotes thorough
mixing and contact between the biomass and the waste  waters.   In  many
ways  the RBC system is a compact version of a trickling filter.  In the
trickling filter the waste waters flow over the media and thus over  the
microbial  flora;  in  the  RBC  system, the flora is passed through the
waste water.
                                   92

-------
The system can be staged  to  enhance  overall  waste  water  reduction.
Organisms  on  the  disks selectively develop in each stage and are thus
particularly adapted to the composition of the waste in that stage.  The
first couple of stages might be used for removal  of  dissolved  organic
matter,  while  the  latter  stages might be adapted to nitrification of
ammonia.


Development^Status

The RBC system was developed independently  in  Europe  and  the  United
States  about  1955  for  the  treatment  of  domestic  waste, but found
application only in Europe.  Currently,  there  are  an  estimated  1000
domestic installations in Europe.21  However, the use of the RBC for the
treatment of meat packing waste is relatively new.  The only operational
information available on its use on meat packing waste was obtained on a
pilot-scale system, although a large installation was recently completed
at  the  Iowa  Beef  Processors  plant in Dakota City, Nebraska, for the
further treatment of meat packing  waste  effluents  from  an  anaerobic
lagoon.   The  .pilot-plant  studies were conducted with a four-stage RBC
system with four-foot diameter disks.  The system was treating a portion
of the effluent from the Austin, Minnesota, anaerobic contact plant used
to treat meat packing waste.  These results  showd  a  BODS  removal  in
excess of 50 percent with loadings less than 0.037 kg BODS on an average
BODS  influent  concentration  of  approximately  25  mg/1.   Data  from
Au-totrol Corporaton revealed ammonia removals of greater than 90 percent
by nitrification in a multistage unit.  Four to eight  stages  of  disks
with  maximum  hydraulic  loadings of 61 liters per day per square meter
(1.5 gallons per day per square foot) of disk area are considered normal
for ammonia removal.


Advantages and Disadvantages

The major advantages of the RBC system are its relatively low  installed
cost;  the  effect  of  staging  to obtain both dissolved organic matter
reduction and removal of ammonia nitrogen by nitrification; and its good
resistance to hydraulic shock loads.  Disadvantages are that the  system
should  be housed, if located in cold climates, to maintain high removal
efficiencies,  to  control  odors,  and  to   minimize   problems   with
temperature  sensitivity.   Although  this  system  has demonstrated its
durability and reliability when used on domestic wastes, it has not  yet
been fully tested to treat meat packing plant wastes.


Uses

Rotating  biological  contactors  could  be  used for the entire aerobic
secondary system.  The number of stages required depends on the  desired
                                   93

-------
degree  of treatment and the influent strength.  Typical applications of
the rotating biological contactor, however, may  be  for  polishing  the
effluent  from  anaerobic  processes and from roughing trickling filters
and as pretreatment prior to discharging wastes to a  municiapl  system.
A BODS reduction of 98 percent is achievable with a four-stage
          Performance of Various Biological Treatment Systems

Table   6   shows  BODS,  suspended  solids  (SS) ,  and  grease  removal
efficiencies for various biological treatment systems used to treat meat
packing waste waters.  Average values are  presented  for  ten  systems;
exemplary  values for five systems.  Exemplary values each represent one
system (except for anaerobic plus aerobic lagoons, where they  represent
two systems) considered to be among the best for that Kind of system and
whose  values  were  actually  verified in the field sampling study con-
ducted during this program.

The number of systems used to calculate average values,  also  shown  in
Table  6,  clearly shows that the anaerobic plus aerobic lagoons are the
most commonly used.  In fact this system was used by about 63 percent of
the plants included in the study that reported having secondary  systems
(see Section VIII) .

The  estimated  value  of  BODS  shown  for  the  anaerobic lagoons plus
rotating biological contactor is based upon pilot-plant results  and  is
considered to be conservative.

The  values  shown  for the anaerobic lagoons plus extended aeration are
also estimated and are all below the values calculated by using  average
removal  efficiencies for the two components of the system individually.
For example, if the BODS reduction for both  the  anaerobic  lagoon  and
extended  aeration were 90 percent, the calculated efficiency of the two
systems combined would be 99.0 percent
                                   94

-------
extended aeration were  90  percent, the calculated efficiency of the  two
systems combined would  be  99,0 percent
                   Table 6.  Performance of Various Secondary
                            Treatment Systems.
Secondary Treatment System
(number of systems used
to determine averages)
Anaerobic + Aerobic
lagoon (22)
Anaerobic + aerated 4-
Aerobic lagoon (3)
Anaerobic Contact Process +
Aerobic lagoon (1)
Extended Aeration +
Aerobic lagoon (1)
Anaerobic lagoon + Rotating
Biological contactor
Anaerobic lagoon + Extended
Aeration + Aerobic lagoon
Anaerobic lagoon +
Trickling filter (1)
2-Stage Trickling filter (1)
Aerated + Aerobic
lagoon (1)
Anaerobic Contact (1)
Water Wasteload Reduction
Average Values
BOD 5
95.4
98.3
98.5
96.0
98. 5e
98e
97.5
95.5
99.4
96.9
SS
93.5
93.3
96.0
86.0
—
93e
94.0
95.0
94.5
97.1
Grease
95.3
98.5
99.0
98.0

98e
96.0
98.0
—
95.8
Exemplary Values
BOD 5
98.9
99.5

96.0




99.4
96.9
SS
96.6
97.5

86.0




94.5
97.1
Grease
98.9
99.2

98.0

i
i

—
95.8
       e - estimated
                                    94A

-------

-------
                    TERTIARY AND ADVANCED TREATMENT
                  Chemical, Precipitation of Phosphorus
Phosphorus is an excellent nutrient for algae and thus can promote heavy
algae blooms.  As such, it cannot be discharged into  receiving  streams
and  its  concentration  should  not be allowed to build up in a recycle
water stream.  However,  the  presence  of  phosphorus  is  particularly
useful in spray irrigation or land utilization systems as a nutrient for
plant growth.

The   effectiveness  of  chemical  precipitation.  Figure  16,  is  well
established and has been verified in full scale during  the  North  Star
verification  sampling  program.  One packing plant operates a dissolved
air flotation system as a chemical precipitation unit and achieves a  95
percent  phosphorus  removal  to  a  concentration  of less than 1 mg/1.
Chemical precipitation can be used for primary (in-plant)   treatment  to
remove  BODS,  suspended  solids,  and  grease,  as discussed earlier in
conjunction with dissolved air flotation.  Also,  it can  pe  used  as  a
final  treatment  following  biological  treatment,  to remove suspended
solids in addition to phosphorus.


Technical Description

Phosphorus occurs in waste water streams from packing  plants  primarily
as  phosphate salts.  Phosphates can be precipitated with trivalent iron
and trivalent aluminum salts.  It can, also, be rapidly precipitated  by
agglomeration  of  the precipitated colloids and by the settling rate of
the agglomerate.18  Laboratory investigation and experience with inplant
operations  have  substantially  confirmed  that  phosphate  removal  is
dependent on pH and that this removal tends to be limited by the optimum
pH  for  the iron and aluminum precipitation occurs in the 4 to 6 range,
whereas the calcium precipitation occurs in  the  alkaline  side  at  pH
values  above  9.5.ls  Coincident  with  the  phosphate  removal  is the
efficient removal of suspended solids which are cleaned from  the  water
in the flocculant.

Since  the  removal  of  phosphorus  is  a  two-step  process  involving
precipitation and then agglommeration, and both  are  sensitive  to  pH,
setting  the  pH level takes on added significance.  If a chemical other
than lime is used in the precipitation-coagulation process,  two  levels
of  pH  are  required.   Precipitation  occurs  on  the  acid  side  and
coagulation is best carried out on the alkaline side.   The  precipitate
is removed by sedimentation or by dissolved air flotation.18
                                  95

-------
Polyelectrolytes  are  polymers  that can be used as primary coagulants,
flocculation aids, filter aids, or for sludge conditioning.   Phosphorus
removal may be enhanced by the use of such polyelectrolytes by producing
a better floe than might occur without such chemical addition*23

The chemically precipitated sludge contains grease and organic matter in
addition  to the phosphorus, if the system is used in primary treatment.
If it is used as a post-secondary treatment, the sludge volume  will  be
less  and  it  will contain primarily phosphorus salts.  The sludge from
either treatment can be landfilled without difficulty.
                                                   Float
Primary
or
Secondary 	 ^
Treatment
Effluent

PH
Ajustment

i
s

i
Chemical
Addition

N
J
1
Air
Flotation
System

Partial
	 	 ^ lertiary
Treated
Effluent
                                                          V
                                                       Sludge
                                                          to
                                                       Disposal
                      Figure 16.  Chemical Precipitation
Deyelopment Status

This process is well-established and understood  technically.    Although
its use on meat industry waste  is very  limited,  it  is  gaining  acceptance
as  a  primary waste treatment  process.  Where it is in use, it is  being
operated successfully if the .process chemistry   is  understood  and  the
means to control the process are available.
                                   96

-------
Problems and Reliability

As indicated above, the reliability of this process  is well  established;
however,  it  is a chemical process and as such  requires the appropriate
control and operating procedures.  The problems  that can be   encountered
in operating this process are those caused by a  lack of understanding  or
inadequate  equipment.  Sludge disposal is not expected to be a  problem.
The  use  of  polyelectrolytes  and  their  effect   on  the    dewatering
properties of the sludge are open to some question at the present time.
                              Sand Filter

A  slow sand filter is a specially prepared bed  of  sand  or  other  mineral
fines on which doses of waste water are intermittently applied  and   from
which  effluent  is  removed  by an under-drainage  system.  Figure 17;  it
removes solids  from  the  waste  water  stream.    BOD5   removal  occurs
primarily  as  a function of the degree of solids removal,  although  some
biological action occurs in the top inch or two  of  sand.  Effluent   from
the  sand  filter  is  of  a high quality with BODS and  suspended solids
concentrations of less than 10 mg/1.2*  Although the  performance of   a
sand  filter  is  well  known  and  documented,  it is not  in common use
because it is not needed to reach current waste  water standards.

A rapid sand filter functions as the slow sand filter but  operation  is
under  pressure  in  a  closed  vessel  or may be built  in  open concrete
tanks.  It is primarily a water treatment device and thus would be   used
as  tertiary  treatment,  following  secondary   treatment.   Mixed media
filters are special versions of rapid sand filters  that permit  deeper
bed-penetration  by  gradation  of  particle  sizes in the  bed.   Up-flow
filters are, also, special cases of rapid filters.

                                            Chlorination,
                                              Optional
    Primary or
    Secondary
    Treatment
     Effluent
                                            for Odor Control
                                      V
                                 Surface nr  Back
                                  Clean or  Wash
                                   to Regenerate
* -> Treated
     Effluent
                  Figure 17.   Sand Filter System


                                  97

-------
Technical Description

The slow sand filter removes solids primarily  at  the  surface  of  the
filter.  The rapid sand filter is operated to allow a deeper penetration
of suspended solids into the sand bed and thereby achieve solids removal
through  a  greater cross-section of the bed.  The rate of'filtration of
the rapid filter is up to 100 times that of the slow filter.  Thus,  the
rapid  filter  requires  substantially  less  area than the slow filter;
however, the cycle time averages  about  24  hours  in  comparison  with
cycles  of  up  to  30  to 60 days for a slow filter.25  The larger area
required for the latter means a higher first cost.   For  small  plants,
the  slow  sand  filter  can  be used as secondary treatment.  In larger
sizes, the labor in maintaining and cleaning  the  surface  may  operate
against  its  use.   The rapid sand filter on the other'hand can be used
following secondary treatment,  but  would  tend  to  clog  quickly  and
require  frequent  automatic backwashing if used as secondary treatment,
resulting in a high water use.  This washwater would also need treatment
if the rapid sand filter is used following conventional solids removal.

The rapid filters  operate  essentially  unattended  with  pressure-loss
control  and  piping  installed  for automatic backwashing.   They may be
enclosed in concrete structures or in steel tanks.*3


Clean-up of the rapid sand filter requires backwashing  of  the  bed  of
sand  with  a  greater  quantity  of  water  than used for the slow sand
filter.  Backwashing is an effective clean-up  procedure  and  the  only
constraint  is  to  minimize  the washwater required in clean-up as this
must be disposed of in some appropriate manner other than discharging it
to a stream.


Development Status

The slow sand filter has been in use for 50 years and more.  It has been
particularly well suited to small cities and isolated treatment  systems
serving  hotels, motels, hospitals, etc., where treatment of low flow is
required and land and sand are available.  Treatment in  these  applica-
tions  has  been  a  sanitary-  or  municipal-type  raw waste.  The Ohio
Environmental Protection Administration is .a  strong  advocate  of  slow
sand  filters  as a secondary treatment for small meat plants, following
some form of settling or solids removal.  As  of  early  1973,  16  sand
filters  had  been  installed  and  8  were  proposed and expected to be
installed.  All 24 of these installations were  on  waste  from  packing
plants.26  The  land  requirements  for  a  slow  sand  filter  are  not
particularly significant in relation to  those  required  for  lagooning
purposes  in  secondary  treatment  processes.  However, the quality and
quantity of sand is important and may be a constraint in the use of sand
filters in some local situations.  It should, also, be  recognized  that
                                   98

-------
this  process  requires hand labor for raking the crust that develops on
the surface.  Frequency of raking may be weekly  or  monthly,  depending
upon the degree of previous treatment and the gradation of the sand.


Problems and_

The  reliability of the slow sand filter seems to be well established in
its long-term use as a municipal waste treatment system.  When the  sand
filter  is  operated  intermittently  there  should  be little danger of
operating mishap with resultant discharge of untreated effluent or  poor
quality  effluent.   The  need for bed cleaning becomes evident with the
reduction in quality of the effluent or in  the  increased  cycle  time,
both  of which are subject to monitoring and control.  Operation in cold
climates is possible as  long  as  the  appropriate  adjustment  in  the
surface  of  the  bed  has  been  made to prevent blockage of the bed by
freezing water.  Chlorination, both before  and  after  sand  filtering,
particularly  in  the use of rapid filters, may be desirable to minimize
or eliminate potential odor problems and slimes that may cause clogging.

The rapid sand filter has  been  used  extensively  in  water  treatment
plants  and  in  municipal sewage treatment for tertiary treatment; thus
its use in tertiary treatment of secondary treated effluents  from  meat
plants  appears  to be a practical method of reducing BOD5 and suspended
solids to  levels  below  those  expected  from  conventional  secondary
treatment.


                        Microscreen-Microstrainer

A  microstrainer is a filtering device that uses a fine mesh screen on a
partially submerged rotating drum to remove suspended solids and thereby
reduce  the  BOD5  associated  with  those  solids.  Figure   18.    The
microstrainer  is  used as a tertiary treatment following the removal of
most of the solids from the waste water stream.   The  suspended  solids
and  BODS  can be reduced to 3 to 5 mg/1 in municipal systems. 19  There
are no reports of their use in the  tertiary  treatment  of  meat  plant
wastes.
Secondary
Tredtment ^
Effluent
Micro-
Screen
N
f
Bo
s
>
ckwash
Clear
to
Screen/Strainer
^ Tertiary
                                                      Effluent
                    Figure 18.  Microscreen/Microstrainer

                                   99

-------
Technical Description

The  micros-trainer  is  a  filtration  device in which a stainless steel
microfataric is used as the filtering medium.  The steel  wire  cloth  is
mounted  on the periphery of a drum which is rotated partially submerged
in the waste water.  Backwash  immediately  follows  the  deposition  of
solids  on  the  fabric,  and  in  one installation, this is followed by
ultraviolet light exposure to  inhibit  microbiological  growth.*9   The
backwash  water  containing the solids amounts to about 3 percent of the
waste water  stream  and  must  be  disposed  of  by  recycling  to  the
biological  treatment system.28  The drum is rotated at a minimum of 0.7
and up to a maximum of U.3 revolutions per minute.19  The  concentration
and  percentage  removal  performance  for  microstrainers  on suspended
solids and BODS appear to be approximately the same as for sand filters.


Development Status

While there is general  information  available  on  the  performance  of
microstrainers  and on tests involving the use of them, there appears to
be only one recorded installation of a microstrainer in use on  municipal
waste;  the requirements for effluent quality have not necessitated such
installation.   The  economic  comparisons  between  sand  filters   and
microstrainers  are  inconclusive; the mechanical equipment required for
the microstrainer may be a greater factor than the land requirement  for
the sand filter at the present time.


Problems and Reliability

The  test  performance  of the microstrainer fairly well establishes the
reliability of the device in its ability to remove suspended solids  and
the  associated  BODjj.  Operating and maintenance problems have not been
reported; this is probably because, in large part, of the limited use of
the device in  full-scale  applications.   As  a  mechanical  filtration
device  requiring  a  drive  system,  it  would  have normal maintenance
requirements associated with that Kind of mechanical  equipment.   As  a
device  based  on  microopenings  in  a fabric, it would be particularly
intolerant to any degree of grease loading.


                     Nitrigication-Denitrif.ication

This two-step process of nitrification and denitrification,  Figure  19,
is  a  system to remove the nitrogen which appears as ammonia in treated
meat plant waste waters, and it is of primary importance for removal  of
the ammonia generated in anaerobic secondary treatment systems.  Ammonia
removal is becoming more important because of stream standards being set
at  levels  as  low  as  1 to 2 mg/1.7  In chemical balance as described
                                   100

-------
below removal of ammonia is virtually complete, with  the  nitrogen gas as
the end product.


Technical Description

The large quantities of organic matter in raw waste   from  meat   packing
plants is frequently and effectively treated in anaerobic lagoons.   Much
of  the  nitrogen  in  the organic matter, present mainly as  protein,  is
converted to ammonia in anaerobic  systems  or  in  localized anaerobic
environments.   The  following sets of equations indicate the nitrifica-
tion of the ammonia to nitrites and nitrates, followed  by the subsequent
denitrificaticn  to  nitrogen  and  nitrous  oxide.28  The  responsible
organisms are indicated also.
Secondary
Treatment
Effluent
Aeration
System

N.
/
\ '
Anaerobic
Pond

N

Aeration
Cell

Tertiary
^ Treated
Effluent
                         Carbon
                         Source,
                       e.g. Methanol
              Figure 19.   Nitrification/Denitrification
Nitrification:
         NH3 + 02
N02- •*• H30+     (Nitrosomonas)
         2NO2- +02
2NC3-
(Nitrobacter)
    Denitrification  (using methanol  as  carbon  source)

         6H+ + 6NO_- + 5CH_OH         5C02 + 3N2  +  13  H20

         Small  amounts  of  N20  and   NO are,  also, formed (Facultative
                   heterotrophs)


Nitrification does not occur to any  great  extent  until   most  of  the
carbonaceous material has been removed  from the waste  water stream.  The
ammonia   nitrification   is   carried   out  by  aerating   the   effluent
                                  101

-------
sufficiently long to assure the conversion of all the
raw  effluent  to  the  nitrite-nitrate  forms  prior
denitrification step.
nitrogen  in  the
to  the anaerobic
The denitrification step, converting nitrates to nitrogen  and  nitrogen
oxides,  takes place in the absence of oxygen.  It is thought to proceed
too slowly without the addition of a biodegradable carbon source such as
sugar, ethyl alcohol, acetic acid, or methanol.  Methanol is  the  least
expensive  and  performs  satisfactorily.  Investigators working on this
process have found that  a  30  percent  excess  of  methanol  over  the
stiochiometric amount is required.*3,3°

In current waste treatment practice using anaerobic and aerobic lagoons,
ammonia  nitrogen that disappears in the aerobic system does not show up
to a large extent as nitrites and nitrates.  Ammonia  stripping  is  not
likely  to  account  for the loss.  It appears that denitrification must
actually be occurring in the bottom  reaches  of  the  aerobic  lagoons,
where anaerobic conditions are probably approached*

Presuming total conversion of the ammonia to nitrites or nitrates, there
will  be  virtually  no  nitrogen remaining in the effluent from the de-
nitrification process.  Total nitrogen removal can be maintained  at  90
percent  over  the  range  of operating temperatures; the rate increases
with temperature to an optimum value  of  approximately  30°C  for  most
aerobic  waste  systems.   Temperature  increases beyond 30° result in a
decrease in the rate for the mesophilic organisms.28

The waste water is routed to  a  second  aeration  basin  following  de-
nitrification,  where  the  nitrogen  and  nitrogen  oxide  are  readily
stripped from the waste stream as gases.  The sludge from each stage  is
settled and recycled to preserve the organisms required -for each step in
the process.


Development Status
  11       -• -  — r ~ -v

The specific nitrification-denitrification process has  been carried out
successfully  at  the  bench-  and  pilot-scale levels.  Gulp and Culp23
suggest that the "practicality of consistently maintaining the necessary
biological reactions and the related economics must be demonstrated on a
plantdeveloped at the Cincinnati water Research Laboratory  of  the  EPA
and  is  being  built  at  Manassas,  Virginia.3*   This  work and other
demonstrated useful concepts are reported  in  a  recent  EPA  technical
booklet.  *7  As  mentioned above, observations of treatment lagoons for
meat packing plants gives some indication that the  suggested  reactions
are  occurring  in  present  systems.   Also,  Halvorson32 reported that
Pasveer is achieving success in denitrification by carefully controlling
the reaction rate in an oxidation ditch, so that dissolved oxygen levels
drop to zero just before the water is reaerated by the next rotor.
                                   102

-------
Problems and Reliability

In view of the experimental status of this process,  it  would  be  pre-
mature  to speculate on the reliability or problems incumbent in a full-
scale operation.  It would appear that there would  be  not  exceptional
maintenance  or residual pollution problems associated with this process
in view of the mechanisms suggested for its implementation at this time.

                           Ammonia Stripping

Ammonia stripping is a modification of the simple aeration  process  for
removing  gases in water. Figure 20.  Following pH adjustment, the waste
water is fed to a packed tower and allowed  to  flow  down  through  the
tower  with  a' countercurrent air stream introduced at the bottom of the
tower flowing upward to strip the ammonia.  Ammonia-nitrogen removals of
up to 98 percent and down to concentrations of less  than  1  mg/1  have
been achieved in experimental ammonia stripping towers.23


Technical Description

The  pH of the waste water from a secondary treatment system is adjusted
to between 11 and 12 and the waste water is fed to a packed tower or  to
a  cooling  tower type of stripping tower.  As pH is shifted above 9 the
ammonia is present as the soluble gas in the waste water  stream  rather
than  as the ammonium ion.30  Ammonia-nitrogen removal of 90 percent was
achieved with countercurrent air flows between 1.8 and 2.2 cubic  meters
per  liter   (250  and  300  cubic  feet per gallon) of waste water in an
experimental tower with hydraulic loadings between 100  and  125  liters
per  minute  per  square  meter (2.5 and 3 gallons per minute per square
foot).  A maximum of 98 percent ammonia removal was  reported  with  the
air rate at 5.9 cubic meters per liter (800 cubic feet per gallon)  and a
hydraulic  loading of 33 liters per minute per square meter (0.8 gallons
per minute per square foot).  The ammonia concentration was  reduced  to
less  than  one  part  per  million  at  98  percent  removal.  The high
percentage removal of ammonia-nitrogen is achieved only at a substantial
cost in terms of air requirements and stripping  tower  cross  sectional
area.23

Because  the  system  involves  the  stripping  of  ammonia from a water
stream, ambient air temperatures below 0°C  (32°F)  present  a  problem;
operation   in   cold   climates   may   require  somewhat  more  costly
modifications such as housing inside a building or heating  of  the  air
prior  to introducing it to the stripping tower.  The residual pollution
would  be  the  ammonia  stripped  from  the  waste  water  stream   and
concentration  of  ammonia  in  the  air stream prior to mixing with the
ambient air would be about 10 milligrams per cubic  meter,  whereas  the
threshhold for odor is about 35 milligrams per cubic meter. 23t
                                  103

-------
Development Status

The  ammonia stripping process is a well-established industrial  practice
in the petroleum refinery industry.   The only  significant  difference
between petroleum refinery application and that on  a meat  packing   plant
waste  would probably be the comparatively small  size of stripping  tower
for the meat packing plants in comparison  to  the  refinery.    The  air
stripping of ammonia from secondary effluent is reported primarily  on an
experimental  basis in equipment that is 1.8 meters (6  feet) in  diameter
with a packing depth of up to 7.3 meters  (24 feet).  Two large
    Secondary
    Treatment
    Effluent
   PH
Adjustment
                                                           Treated
                                                           Effluent
                     Figure 20.  Ammonia Stripping
scale installations of ammonia  stripping of  lime  treated  waste  water  are
reported at South Tahoe, California, and Windhoek,   South  Africa.23,118
The  South  Tahoe  ammonia  stripper  was rated at  14.2 M liters  per  day
(3.75 MGD) and was essentially  constructed as  a cooling tower  structure
rather  than as a cylindrical steel tower which might be  used in  smaller
sized plants.

Thus, although there  is no  reported use of   ammonia stripping  on  meat
packing  plant waste, the technology is well established  and implementa-
tion, when standards  require it, should be without  difficulty.


Problems and Reliabjility

The reliability of this process has been established by   the  petroleum
refinery  uses  of  the  process  over many  years,   although operational
                                   104

-------
difficulties in very cold climates,  and  maintenance  problems  due  to
scaling  of  the  stripping  tower  have been encountered.  Although the
source  of  the  ammonia  may  be  different  and  there  may  be  other
contaminants  in  the  water  stream,  none  of  this  should affect the
established reliability of this process.  The experience of other  users
of the process will have pretty well identified potential problems, andr
presumably,   the   solutions   for  these  problems.   The  maintenance
requirements would be only those normally associated with the mechanical
equipment involved in pumping the waste water to the top of  the  tower,
where  the  feed  is introduced to the tower, and in maintaining the air
blowers.  The tower fill would undoubtedly be designed for the  kind  of
service  involved  in  treating  a  wa ste  water  stream  that  has some
potential for fouling.

                         Spray/Flood^Irricration

A no discharge level for meat packing waste can be achieved by  the  use
of  spray  or  flood  irrigation  of relatively flat land, surrounded by
dikes which prevent run-off and upon which a  cover  crop  of  grass  or
other  vegetation  is  maintained.   Waste Water disposal is achieved by
this method to the level of no discharge.  Specific plant situations may
preclude the installation of irrigation systems; however, where they are
feasible, serious consideration should be given to them.


Technical Description

Wastes are disposed of in spray or  flood  irrigation  systems  by  dis-
tribution  through piping and spray nozzles over relatively flat terrain
or by the pumping and disposal through the ridge and  furrow  irrigation
systems which allow a certain level of flooding on a given plot of land.
Figure  21.   Pretreatment for removal of solids is advisable to prevent
plugging of the spray nozzles, or deposition in the furrows of a  ridge-
and-furrow  system,  or  collection  of solids on the surface, which may
cause odor problems  or  clog  the  soil.   Therefore,  the  BOD£  would
undoubtedly  have  already  been reduced in the preliminary treatment in
preparation for distribution through the spray system.


In a flood irrigation system the waste loading in the effluent would  be
limited  by  the  waste  loading  tolerance of the particular crop being
grown on the land, or it may  be  limited  by  the  soil  conditions  or
potential for vermin or odor problems.
                                  105

-------
Waste Water distributed in either manner percolates through the  soil and
the organic matter in the waste undergoes a biological degradation.  The
liquid in the waste stream is either stored in the soil or leached to  a
groundwater  aquifer and discharges into the groundwater.  Approximately
io percent of the waste flow will be  lost  by  evapotranspiration   (the
loss  caused  by  evaporation  to  the  atmosphere through the leaves of
plants) . a®
Primary,
Secondary
or
Tertiary
Treatment
Effluent

Holding
Basin




Pumping
System

N.


Application
Site


                                                        V
                                                     Grass or
                                                     Hay Crop
                Figure 21.  Spray/Flood Irrigation System
Spray runoff irrigation is  an  alternative  technique  which   has   been
tested  on  the waste from a small meat packer39 and  on cannery waste.*0
With this technique, about 50 percent of the waste water applied to   the
soil  is  allowed  to run off as a discharge rather than no  discharge as
discussed here.  The runoff or discharge from  this  type  of  irrigation
system  is  of higher quality than the waste water as applied,  with  BOD5
removal of about 80 percent, total organic carbon and ammonia  nitrogen
are  about  85  percent  reduced, and phosphorus is about 65 percent re->
duced.39

The following factors will affect the ability  of a particular  land   area
to  absorb  waste water:  1) character of the  soil, 2) stratification of
the soil profile, 3) depth to groundwater, U)  initial moisture  content,
5) terrain and groundcover.2°

The  greatest  concern  in the use of irrigation as a disposal system is
the total dissolved solids content and particularly the salt content  of
the waste water.  A maximum salt content of 0.15 percent is  suggested in
Eckenfelder.28   In  order  to  achieve  this   level  of salt content, 30
                                   106

-------
percent  of  the  total  waste  water  stream  from  a typical plant was
determined to require treatment in an ion exchange system upstream  from
the spray irrigation system.

An application rate of 330 liters per minute per hectare (35 gallons per
minute  per  acre)   has  been recommended in determining the quantity of
land required for various plant sizes.  This amounts to almost 5  cm  (2
inches)   of  moisture  per  day and is relatively low' in comparison with
application rates reported by Eckenfelder for various  spray  irrigation
systems.  However,  soils vary widely in their percolation properties and
experimental irrigation of a small area is recommended before a complete
system  is  built.    In  many areas, rates as low as one-fourth inch per
acre per day are  prerequisite  for  conservative,  long  term  disposal
requirements.   This  latter  rate  may be particularly applicable where
some type of cropping or land conservation activity is to be  conducted.
In  such  instances,  requirements  for intermittent irrigation of waste
water (i.e., supplemental to rainfall or other irrigation water  source)
may dictate storage volumes and disposal rates.  Care must also be given
to  a  balanced  nutrient  load (normally nitrogen)  applied to any given
soil or crop.  A number of grass and clover crops, for example,  may  be
expected  to thrive when treated waste waters serve to supplement normal
moisture and nitrogen supplies.  One recent example of the  use  of  the
general  concept  in  the industry contemplates installation of a system
for irrigation disposal of 1.2 million gallons per day on  approximately
400  acres.   This translates to very conservative loading rates of less
than 0.1 inches per acre per day; at the same time,  the  systems  shows
how  planning flexibility is often useful to allow disposal on alternate
days or alternate sections of  land  at  higher  rates  if  this  proves
desireable.

The  economic benefit from spray irrigation is estimated on the basis of
raising one crop of grass hay per season with a  yield  of  13.4  metric
tons of dry matter per hectare  (six tons per acre) and values at $22 per
metric  ton  ($20  per ton).  These figures are conservative in terms of
the number of crops and the price to be expected from a grass hay  crop.
The supply and demand sensitivity as well as transportation problems for
moving  the  hay  crop  to  a  consumer  all  mitigate  against any more
optimistic estimate of economic benefit.29

Cold climate uses of spray irrigation may be subject to more constraints
and greater land requirements than plants operating  in  more  temperate
climates.   However,  a  meat  packer in Illinois reportedly operated an
irrrigation system successfully.  Eckenfelder also reports  that  wastes
have  been successfully disposed of by spray irrigation from a number of
other industries.

North star found in its survey that  the  plants  located  in  the  arid
regions  of  the  southwest  were  most  inclined  to use spray or flood
irrigation systems.  Additional details on the general subject  of  land
                                   107

-------
disposal  may  be  found  in  the,  "Development Document Guidelines for
Effluent Limitations and standards of Performance for  New  sources  for
the Feedlots Point Source Category", EPA January 1974.


Problems and Reliability

The  long-term  reliability  of  spray  or flood irrigation systems is a
function of the ability of the soil to continue to accept the  waste  as
it  is  disposed  of through the irrigation system/ and thus reliability
remains  somewhat  open  to . question.   Problems  in  maintenance   are
primarily  in  the  control  of .the  proper  dissolved solids level and
salinity content  of  the  waste  water  stream  and  also  in  climatic
limitations that may exist or develop.  Many soils are improved by spray
irrigation;  at  the  same  time,  use  of  this  concept  is  a  manner
commensurate with crop/soil needs will militate  potential  problems  of
overland or subsurface runoff to streams.


                              Ion Exchange

Ion  exchange,  as a tertiary waste treatment, is used as a deionization
process in which specific ionic species are removed, from the waste water
stream. Figure 22.  Ion exchange would be used to  remove  salt  (sodium
chloride)  from  waters.  Ion exchange resin systems have been developed
to remove  specific  ionic  species,  to  achieve  maximum  regeneration
operating  efficiency,  and  to  achieve a desired effluent quality.  In
treating meat packing waste, the desired effluent  quality  is  a  total
waste  water  salt  concentration of 300 mg/1*  Ion exchange systems are
available that will remove up to 90 percent  of  the  salt  in  a  water
stream. 19  They can also be used to remove nitrogen.
Technical Description

The  deionization  of  water by means of ion exchange resin involves the
use of  both  cation  and  anion  exchange  resins  in  sequence  or  in
combination to remove an electrolyte such as salt. »•
              RSO3 + Nad        RS03N3 + HCl
              R-OH + HCl      R-C1  ^
where R represents the resin
The  normal practice in deionization of water has been to make the first
pass through a strong acid column, cation exchange resin, in  which  the
first  reaction  above occurs.  Effluent from the first column is passed
to a second column of anion exchange resin to remove the acid formed  in
the  first  step,  as indicated in the second reaction.  As indicated in
the two reactions, the sodium chloride ions have been removed  as  ionic
                                  108

-------
species.   A  great  variety  of ion exchange resins, used  singley  or  in
mixed bed units,  have  been  developed  over  the  years   for   specific
deionization objectives for various water quality conditions.


Waste Water treatment with ion exchange resins has been investigated and
attempted for over 40 years; however, recent process developments in the
treatment  of  secondary  effluent  have been particularly  successful  in
achieving high quality effluent  at  reasonable  capital  and  operating
costs.   One  such process is a modification of the Rohm and Haas,  Desal
process. *9  In this process a weak base ion exchange resin is converted
to the bicarbonate form and the secondary effluent  is  treated  by the
resin to convert the inorganic salts.  After the first step, the process
includes  a  flqcculation/aeration  and  precipitation  step  to remove
organic matter; however, this should be unnecessary if the  sand filter
and/or  carbon  adsorption  system  is used upstream of the ion  exchange
system.  The effluent from the first  ion  exchange  column is  further
treated  by  a  weak  cation  resin  to  reduce the final dissolved salt
content to approximately five mg/1.  The anion resin in this process   is
regenerated  with  aqueous  ammonia and the cation resin with an aqueous
sulfuric acid.  The resins did not appear to be susceptible to  fouling
by  the  organic  constituents  of  the  secondary effluent used in this
experiment.   .
         Partial
        Tertiary
       Treatment
        Effluent
                                                 Tertiary
                                                 Treated
                                                 Effluent
Backwash  8
 Regenerant
  System
                      Figure 22.  Ion Exchange
                                   109

-------
Other types of resins can be used for nitrate and phosphate removal,  as
well  as color bodies, COD, and fine suspended matter.  Removal of these
various constituents can range from 75 percent to 97 percent.

The cycle time on the ion exchange unit will be a function of  the  time
required  to block or to take up the ion exchange sites available in the
resin contained in the system.  Blockage occurs when the resin is fouled
by suspended matter and other contaminants.  The ion exchange system  is
ideally  located  at  the end of the waste water processing scheme/ thus
having the highest quality effluent available as a feedwater.    The  ion
exchange system needed for irrigation purposes  (mentioned earlier)  based
on  an  assumed  inlet  salt concentration of 2000 mg/1, was required to
tr^at 30 percent of the waste water stream.  This inlet concentration is
fairly  conservative,  based  on  the  North  Star  survey  data.    Salt
concentration  should  be  easily  reduced  to 1000 mg/1 and less with a
minimal effort at controlling salt discharge into the waste water.

To achieve a recyclable water quality, it may be assumed that less  than
500  mg/1  of  total dissolved solids would have to be achieved,  of the
total dissolved solids, 300 mg/1 of salt are assumed to  be  acceptable.
To  achieve  this  final effluent quality, 95 percent of the wast,e water
stream would be subjected to ion exchange treatment.

The residual pollution will be that resulting from regeneration  of  the
ion  exchange  bed.   The  resin  systems  as  indicated earlier,  can be
tailored  to  the  ion  removal  requirements  and  efficient   use   of
regeneration   chemicals   thus   minimizing   liquid  wastes  from  the
regeneration step.
Development Status
Ion exchange as a unit operation is well established and  commonly  used
in   a   wide  range  of  applications  in  water  treatment  and  water
deionization.  Water softening for boiler feed  treatment  and  domestic
and  commercial  use is probably the most widespread use of ion exchange
in water treatment.  Deionization of water by ion exchange  is  used  to
remove   carbon  dioxide;  metal  salts  such  as  chlorides,  sulfates,
nitrates,  and  phosphates;  silica;  and  alkalinity.    Specific  resin
applications such as in wastewater treatment have not been widespread up
to  the  present  time, as there has not been a need for such a level of
treatment.  However, process  development  and  experimental  work  have
shown  the  capability  of ion exchange systems to achieve the levels of
salt removal required for the suggested irrigation and closed-loop water
recycle systems examined in this report.

Part of the economic success of  an  ion  exchange  system  in  treating
packing  plant  waste  will  probably  depend on a high quality effluent
                                  110

-------
being available as a feed material.  This again, can be provided  by  an
upstream treatment system including carbon adsorption or sand filtration
to  remove  a  maximum  of the particularly bothersome suspended organic
material.  However, the affect of a low quality feed would be  primarily
economic  because of shorter cycle times, rather than a reduction in the
overall effectiveness of the ion exchange system in removing a  specific
ionic species such as salt.


Problems and Reliability

Inasmuch  as ion exchange is widely used/ the reliability of the concept
is well  established.   The  application  of  the  technology  in  waste
treatment  has  not  been tested and, therefore, the reliability in that
application has yet to be firmly established.  The  problems  associated
with  ion  exchange  operations would primarily center on the quality of
the feed to the ion exchange system and its effect on  the  cycle  time.
The  operation and control of the deionization-regeneration cycle can be
totally  automated,  which  would  seem  to  be  the  desired  approach.
Regeneration  solution  is used periodically to restore the ion exchange
resin to its original state for continued use.  This  solution  must  be
disposed  of  following its use and that may require special handling or
treatment.  The relatively small quantity of  regenerant  solution  will
facilitate its proper disposal by users of this system.
                           Carbon Adsorption

Carbon  adsorption is a unit operation in which activated carbon adsorbs
soluble and trace organic matter from waste water  streams,  Figure  23.
Either granular or powdered activated carbon can be used to remove up to
98  percent of colloidal and dissolved organics measured as BODS and COD
in a waste water stream. 30  The organic molecules  which  make  up  the
organic  material  attach  themselves  to  the  surface of the activated
carbon and are thereby removed.  Larger  particles  should
from   the  waste  water  in  treatment  systems  upstream
adsorption since the effectiveness of the latter will  be
reduced  by  gross  particles  of  organic matter.  Total organic carbon
removal efficiencies of about 50 to 55 percent have  been  reported  for
carbon  adsorbers and 45 to 50 percent removal of soluble organic carbon
is reported. 118 Carbon adsorption treatment of meat packing waste would
be required only if a closed  loop  water  recycle  system  were  to  be
installed with a requisite low organic concentration.
 be  filtered
 from  carbon
substantially
                                  111

-------
Technical Description

Activated  carbon  in  a  granular  or   powdered  form provides an active
surface for the attachment and resultant removal   of  organic  molecules
from  waste  water streams.  This is a  surface  adsorption phenomenon and
is not preferential for any particular  molecule.   Thus,  in  addition  to
trace  organic  matter, odors and color bodies  will  also be removed from
the waste water stream by carbon adsorption.  The rate of adsorption  is
controlled  by the rate of diffusion of the organic  molecules within the
capillary pores of the carbon particles.  This  rate  varies  inversely
with  the  square of the particle diameter and  increases with increasing
concentration of organic matter and with increasing  temperature.   The
implication  of  the  particle  diameter-adsorption  rate relationship is
that the smaller the carbon particle the larger the  adsorption rate will
be, in any given system.  This factor is the  basis for the  interest  in
powdered activated carbon in preference to granular  carbon. a3
     Partial Tertiary
       Treatment  -
        Effluent
Adsorption
  Column
                                 Carbon
                            Regeneration and
                                 Storage
Tertiary
Treated
Effluent
                     Figure 23.  Carbon Adsorption
The  granular  carbon   is   effectively  used  in  packed or expanded bed
adsorbers.  A number cf processes  have been experimentally attempted  to
utilize powdered carbon in  various process systems such as the fluidized
bed  and  carbon^effluent slurry systems.   Regeneration of the carbon is
periodically   required,.     A   standard   regeneration   technique   is
incineration  of   the   organic   matter  deposited  on the surface of the
carbon.   It is economically important  to   regenerate  and  recover  the
carbon  and  regeneration   has   been  a serious limitation to the use of
powdered  activated carbon up to the present time.
                                  112

-------
Carbon adsorption will remove up to about 98 percent  of  the  colloidal
and  dissolved  organic  matter with resulting effluent COD's down to 12
mg/1 in any of the various physical systems devised for contacting
activated carbon and waste water.  This is  a  finishing  treatment  for
waste  water  intended  to . remove the trace organic material left after
standard secondary and partial tertiary treatment.  Essentially  all  of
the  gross organic particles must be removed from the waste water before
entering this treatment system. 23

The residual pollution associated with carbon adsorption  will  be  that
caused  by  regeneration  and  a  properly  operated  low oxygen furnace
achieving complete combustion of the organic matter  should  present  no
pollution problem for the surrounding air environment.


          £_ Status

Activated  carbon treatment in water purification is common practice and
well established.  Several large scale  pilot  projects  testing  carbon
adsorption  as  a  treatment of waste waters are presently underway.  In
addition, carbon towers have been used  for  the  removal  of  suspended
solids  in  a small number of municipal treatment systems requiring high
quality effluent.  The treatment has not been  applied  specifically  to
meat  packing plant effluent; however, at the point in a waste treatment
system where an activated carbon system would be used, there
no  significant  difference  between  municipal  waste
waste.  The effluent should be of high quality.
      should  be
and meat packing
The primary question demanding the attention of  research  investigators
in  the  use of this system is to find an economic method for the use of
activated carbon in powdered form rather than granular form.
Since this  technology  is  well  established  in  the  water  treatment
industry,  it  presumably  can  be  operated  with  the  proper  type of
feedstream on an efficient and reliable basis.  While the  treatment  of
waste  water  for  this  system  is largely limited to large scale pilot
projects, the reliability  and  utility  of  such  treatment  should  be
clearly established within a relatively short time, certainly before the
need for equipment to meet 1983 standards.

Operating  and  maintenance  problems  do  not  seem  to be significant,
particularly  if  the  quality  of  the  feedwater  is   maintained   by
appropriate  upstream  treatment systems.  Regeneration is no problem in
the packed and expanded bed systems and presumably can be worked out for
powdered carbon systems before the mid 1980 's.
                                  113

-------
                            Reverse Osmosis

The reverse osmosis  process  uses  semipermeable  membranes   to   remove
contaminants  down  to  molecular  size.  Figure   24.    It  is  capable of
removing  divalent  ions  at  efficiencies  of  up to   98  percent  and
monovalent  ions  and  small  organic  molecules at 70  to 90 percent.  33
Total solids concentrations between  25  mg/1   and 65   mg/1   have  been
obtained  in  reverse osmosis effluent.  33  Reverse osmosis would  not be
needed for applications other than a closed loop recycle water  system.
The  application  of  reverse  osmosis   to  date   has   been limited  to
capacities no larger than 190,000 liters (50,000 gallons) per  day.


Tec:hnical Description

Several different kinds of semipermeable membranes are  available for use
in the reverse osmosis process.   Data   are  available   on  the  use  of
cellulose  acetate  membranes.   These and other semipermeable membranes
are more permeable to pure water than to dissolved salt and other  ions
and  molecules.   The  process  operates by reversing the normal osmotic
process  by  increasing  the  pressure   on  the side   of   the membrane
containing  the  contaminated  water  until pure water  flows through the
membrane from the contaminated side to the pure water   side.   Excellent
rejection or removal of essentially all  contaminants in a waste water
Partial
Tertiary
Treatment
Effluent
r\ >
AA >
Pressure
Pump
Reverse
Osmosis
System



i
                                                       Full Tertiary
                                                         Treated
                                                         Effluent
                                         Concentrated
                                           Brine to
                                            Disposal
                       Figure 24.  Reverse Osmosis
                                    114

-------
stream  from  a  meat  packing plant would be achieved through a reverse
osmosis system.  However, the rate at which pure water would be produced
is still unacceptably low  for  economic  application  of  this  system.
Current  development  work  is aimed at improving the rate at which pure
water can be produced, while retaining the high quality of the effluent.


Development Status

The application of reverse osmosis  to  the  treatment  of  waste  water
streams  has  been confined to experiments on domestic sewage on a small
scale.   As  a  waste  treatment  process,  the  limited   capacity   of
commercially  available units and the high operating costs tend to limit
the potential applicability of reverse osmosis waste water treatment  in
the near future.
Problems..and Reliability
The reliability of reverse osmosis remains open to question until larger
scale  and  longer  term  experiments have been conducted on waste water
treatment.  The two operating problems that persist in  reverse  osmosis
are  maintaining  flux  or  water  purification rates and the relatively
short operating life of  the  membranes.   Another  significant  problem
remains  in  the  bacterial  growth  that  has  been observed on reverse
osmosis membranes, which seriously reduces their  operating  efficiency.
Microbial  growth  has also been observed in the support structure under
the membranes.  Chlorine cannot be used because the membranes which  are
presently  available  are  damaged by chlorination,19  Research on these
operating problems is continuing, including membrane research  at  North
Star  Research  Institute,  where  new membranes are being developed and
tested.  For example, a new North Star membrane, NS-1, which  is  formed
on   the  surface  of  a  porous  polysulfone  support  material,  is  a
noncellulosic  membrane  which  has   significantly   better   operating
characteristics than most membranes currently available.


                            glectrodialysis

Electrodialysis  is  a  process that uses an applied electric current to
separate ionic species  in  a  solution.  Figure  25.   Membranes  allow
specific  ions  to  pass  from the waste water stream on one side of the
membrane to a highly concentrated solution of contaminants on the  other
side  of  the  membrane.   Electrodialysis  is  used to remove dissolved
solids such as salt, which is of particular  concern  in  meat  industry
waste,  single-pass removal efficiencies of up to 40 percent of the salt
are the reported performance of the system. 3<>
                                   115

-------
Technical Description

The  electrodialysis  process  incorporates a number of chambers  made  by
alternating anionic and cationic membranes that are arranged  between two
electrodes.  A brine solution  is  alternated  with  contaminated  waste
water   solution  in  the  chambers  between  the  differing   membranes.
Electric current is applied across the  membrane  chambers  causing the
cations  to  move  towards the cathode and the anions  towards the anode.
However, after passing from the chambers containing the waste water into
adjacent brine chambers, the ions  can  travel  no  further   toward the
electrodes.   Their path is blocked by a membrane that is impermeable  to
that particular ionic species.  In this manner, the waste  water   stream
is  depleted  while  the  adjacent  brine stream is enriched  in the ions
which are to be removed.

Power costs limit  the  salinity  of  the  effluent  waste  water  after
treatment in the electrodialysis system to approximately 300  to 500 mg/1
of  salt,  34  This  limitation  is  imposed  because  of the  increase  in
electrical resistance in the treated waste water  that would occur   at
lower concentrations of salt.
Partial
Tertiarv ^
Treatment
Effluent
Electro -
dialysis
System



>
'
                                                        Full Tertiary
                                                          Treated
                                                          Effluent
                                            Concentrated
                                              Brine to
                                              Disposal
                          Figure 25.  Electrodialysis
Development status

The  residual  pollution from an electrodialysis  unit would be the brine
solution used and generated  in the  chambers  of  the   unit.    This  brine
solution  might  be   handled by  a  blowdown  system  which removes the
quantity of salt added  per unit of   time.    Electrodialysis  is  an  old
                                    116

-------
process  and  in  fairly  widespread  use  for  the purpose of desalting
brackish water. 34  The treatment  of  waste  water  in  electrodialysis
systems  has not been done except on an experimental basis.  There is no
reported application of  the  process  on  waste  water  from  the  meat
industry  which  tends  to  have a fairly substantial salt content.  The
potential utility of the process is, therefore, speculative  as  to  its
use  on  waste  water,  however,  its  widespread use in water desalting
suggests that, if the need arises for its application, it is technically
feasible to desalt waste water in such a process.


Problems and Reliability

The reliability of the electrodialysis  system  in  removing  salt  from
waste  waters  is  only  speculative  based  on the use of the system in
desalting brackish waters.  It has demonstrated its reliability  in  the
desalting  application.  The problems associated with using this process
in treating waste water from meat  packing  plants  is  the  substantial
cost,  the  necessity  of brine disposal, and the bacterial growth which
occurs on the dialysis membranes, l8  Chlorine cannot be applied because
it damages the membranes.
                                   117

-------

-------
                              SECTION VIII

              COST, ENERGY, AND NON-WATER QUALITY ASPECTS

                                Summary

The waste water from meat packing plants is  amenable  to  treatment  in
secondary  and tertiary waste treatment systems to achieve low levels of
pollutants  in  the  final  effluent.   In-plant  controls,   by-product
recovery operations, and strict water management practices can be highly
effective  in  reducing  the  wasteload  and  waste  water flow from any
industry plant.   These  water  management  practices  will  reduce  the
requisite  size  of secondary and tertiary treatment systems and improve
their waste reduction effectiveness.

The waste treatment investment for a  typical  plant  in  each  industry
subcategory  is  listed  in Table 7 to achieve each of four successively
increased degrees of treatment:
         A - reduction of organics by the use of anaerobic plus aerated
             plus aerobic lagoon treatment systems and disinfection by
             chlorination.
         B - in-plant controls plus partial tertiary treatment.
         C - no discharge via land disposal by irrigation.
         D - waste water recycle.
The costs reported in Table 7 are  based  on  the  assumption  that  the
average  plant  in  each  subcategory  has  anaerobic plus aerobic waste
treatment lagoons or the equivalent, already installed.  The  costs  are
therefore  the total incremental investment costs required to achieve an
effluent quality associated with each increment of  added  treatment  or
control  from  the  present treatment systems as described above.  These
costs are primarily a function of total waste water flow.   The  average
daily flow used for each subcategory is as follows:

         Simple slaughterhouse - 1.17 M liters/day (0.310 MGD)
         Complex slaughterhouse - 4.35 M liters/day (1.16 MGD)
         Low-Processing packinghouse - 3.4 M liters/day  (0,85 MGD)
         High-Processing packinghouse - 4.4 M liters/day  (1.2 MGD)

Treatment  "A"  comprises  the three lagoon treatment system—anaerobic-
aerated-aerobic lagoons—or its equivalent as the means to  achieve  the
reduction  of the organic load to the 1977 guideline.   The typical plant
in each  of  the  four  industry  subcategories  has  adequate  in-plant
facilities-usually  a  catch  basin—to  preclude  the need for in-plant
additions in stage "A".

Treatment "B" incorporates improved in-plant practices and the  addition
of a dissolved air flotation unit along with an ammonia removal step and
sand  filtering, or the equivalent, in addition to treatment system "A".
                                   119

-------
These  treatment,  systems  are  applicable  to  plants  in  any  of   the
subcategories.   The organic loading  and total waste water flow will  vary
both  within  and between subcategories;  however, these factors influence
treatment system sizing  rather  than   applicability,  as  indicated  in
Section IV.

Treatment   "C"   is the irrigation alternative and includes the treatment
achieved in "A",  plus dissolved air  flotation, ion exchange on a part of
the waste water stream, chlorination,  and the irrigation system.   Total
dissolved   solids  are  a  limiting  factor in water for irrigation;  thus
plants in the "high-processing packinghouses" subcategory, which exhibit
a high average  chloride content in the raw waste (Chapter 5) may need to
devote special  attention to it.

Treatment "D" comprises  all  of  the   treatment  techniques  presumably
required  to  produce a recyclable waste water stream of potable quality.
These technologies can be used by all  of the subcategories if  they   are
effective for any one of them.
      Table 7.   Total Investment Costs Per Plant for Upgrading Present
               Waste Treatment System to Each Stage of Treatment
               (From Unit Costs Given in Tables 12 and 13)
Effluent
Quality

A
B
C
D
Simple
Slaughterhouse

$ 90,000
435,000
278,000
743,000
Complex
Slaughterhouse

$ 159,000
685,000
507,000
1,335; ooo
Low-Processing
Packinghouse

$ 148,000
646,000
468,000
1,244,000
High-Processing
Packinghouse

$ 170,000
758,000
566,000
1,497,000
   *Locker plants were not included in any subcategory, but were assumed to
    require an investment of $10,000 each to go to no discharge by 1977,
    which appears to be the most attractive choice other than municipal
    treatment.
                                    120

-------
The  annual  operating  costs  for  a  treatment  system  to achieve the
indicated effluent quality are  reported  in  Table  9,   The  costs  to
achieve  treatment level "A" range from 12 to 21 cents per head of beef,
depending on the subcategory.  The costs to achieve treatment level  "B"
vary  from  $0.90  to  $1.50  per head more than present waste treatment
costs.  Costs above present for level "C" are about two-thirds of  those
for  level  "B11,  and costs for level D are nearly twice those for level
"B".

Energy consumption associated with waste water  treatment  in  the  meat
industry  is  not a serious constraint, varying from 10 to UO percent of
present power consumption.  The higher percentage  is  for  the  smaller
packing  plants  that  consume  relatively  small quantities of electric
energy at the present time.

With the implementation of these standards,  land  becomes  the  primary
waste  sink  instead of air and water.  The waste to be land filled from
packing plants can improve soils with nutrients  and  soil  conditioners
contained  in  the waste.  Odor problems can be avoided or controlled in
all treatment systems.


                            "TYPICAL" PLANT
The waste treatment systems applicable to  waste  water  from  the  meat
packing  industry can be used by plants in all four subcategories of the
industry.  A  hypothetical  "typical"  plant  was  constructed  in  each
subcategory  as a basis for estimating investment and total annual costs
for  the  application  of  each  waste  treatment  system  within   each
subcategory.   The  costs  were  estimated,  and,  in addition, effluent
reduction, energy requirements, and non-water  quality  aspects  of  the
treatment systems were determined.
                                  121

-------
The waste treatment systems are applied on the basis  of  the  following
plant configurations for each subcategory:
Industry Subcategory

Kill, kg LWK/day
(Ib LWK/day)
Waste Water flow
liters/1000 kg LWK
(gal/1000 Ib LWK)
Raw waste, BOD5
kg/1000 kg LWK
(lb/1000 Ib LWK)
Processed meat
production
kg/day
(Ib/day)
Simple
Slaughter-
house
220,000
(1*84,000)
5,328
(639)
6.0
(6.0)
0
Complex
Slaughter-
house
595,000
(1,310,000)
7,379
(885)
10.9
(10.9)
0
Low-
Processing
Packing-
house
435,000
(900,000)
7,842
(941)
8.1
(8.1)
54,000
(119,000)
High-
Processing
Packing-
house
350,000
(800,000)
12,514
(1,500)
16.1
(16.1)
191,000
(422,000)
The plant size distribution for each subcategory has been estimated on the
basis of responses to the North Star questionnaire as follows:
r
Plant Simple
Small
Medium
Large
TOTAL
65.4%
33.9
0.7
100.0
Complex
0%
50
50
100.0
Low-Processing , High- Processing
63.0%
27.2
9.8
100.0
Q%
17.3
82.7
100.0
Total
50. 4X
39.0
10.6
100.0
Locker plants are not included in this tabulation.  Plant size and annual
kill are related as fellows:

    Small - less than 11.4 MM kgs/year  (25 MM Ib)
     Medium - 11.4 to 91 MM kg/year  (25-200 MM Ib)
    Large - greater than 91 MM kg/year  (200 MM Ib)
                                   122

-------

                 Table 8.   Estimated Total Investment Cost
                           to the Industry to Achieve a Given
                           Level of Effluent Quality from
                           Present Level of Treatment

Effluent
Quality
A
B
C
D

Total Industry
Investment,
($ millions)
52.8*
159.7
119.0
252.2
Investment
Cost per
.million kg LWK
per year
2,355
7,119
5,306
11,240
Investment
Cost per
million Ib LWK
per year
1,069
3 , 232
2,409
5,103
*Includes $10,000 per plant for 2600 locker plants,  totaling  $26 million.
        Table 9.  Total Increase in Annual Cost of Waste Treatment,
                  $/1000 kg ($/1000 Ib) LWK.
Effluent
Quality
A
B
C
D
Simple
Slaughterhouse
0.35
(0.16)
2.93
(1.33)
2.00
(0.91)
4.74
(2.15)
Complex
Slaughterhouse
0.26
(0.12)
1.92
(0.87)
1.34
(0.61)
3.17
(1.44)
Low-processing
Packinghouse
0.33
CO. 15)
2. 44
(1.11)
1.74
(0.79)
4.30
(1.95)
High-Process ing
Packinghouse
0.46
(0.21)
3.37
(1.53)
2.42
(1.10)
5.62
(2.55)
                                  123

-------
              Table 10. Waste Treatment Systems, Their Use
                        and Effectiveness
       Treatment
        System
     Use
   Effluent Reduction
Dissolved air flotation
(DAT)
DAF with pH control and
flocculants added

Anaerobic + aerobic
lagoons
Anaerobic + aerated +
aerobic lagoons
Anaerobic contact
process
Activated sludge
Extended aeration
Anaerobic lagoons +
rotating biological
contactor
Chlorination

Sand filter,

Mlcrostrainer

Electrodialysis
Ion exchange
Ammonia stripping
Carbon adsorption
Chemical precipitation

Reverse osmosis

Spray irrigation
Flood irrigation
Ponding and evaporation
Primary treatment
or by-product
recovery

Primary treatment
or by-product
recovery
Secondary treatment
Secondary treatment

Secondary treatment

Secondary treatment
Secondary treatment
Secondary treatment
Finish and
disinfection
Tertiary treatment &
Secondary treatment
Tertiary treatment
Tertiary treatment
Tertiary treatment
Tertiary treatment
Tertiary treatment

Tertiary treatment

Tertiary treatment

No discharge
No discharge
No discharge
Grease, 60% removal, to
  100 to 200 mg/1
BOD5, 30% removal
SS, 30% removal
Grease, 95-99% removal,
BOD5, 90% removal
SS, 98% removal
BOD , 95% removal
BODg, to 99% removal
BOD , 90-95% removal
BOD , 90-95% removal
BOD , 95% removal
BOD , 90-95% removal
BOD5, to 5-10 mg/1
SS, to 3-8 mg/1
BOD5, to 10-20 mg/1
SS, to 10-15 mg/1
TDS, 90% removal
Salt, 90% removal
90-95% removal
    , to 98% removal as
  colloidal & dissolved
  organic
Phosphorus, 85-95% removal,
  to 0.5 mg/1 or less
Salt, to 5 mg/1
TDS, to 20 mg/1
Total
Total
Total
                                   124

-------
                        WASTE TREATMENT SYSTEMS

The waste treatment systems included in this report as  appropriate  for
use  on meat packing plant waste water streams can be used by all plants
in the industry.  The treatment systems will work, subject  to  specific
operating  constraints  or  limitations.   However,  the  cost  of  such
treatment systems may be uneconomical or beyond the economic  capability
of some plants.

The  waste  treatment  systems,  their  use,  and  the  minimum effluent
reduction associated with each are listed in Table  10.   The  dissolved
air  flotation  system  can  be used upstream of any secondary treatment
system.   When  operated  without  chemicals,  the   by-product   grease
recovered  in  the  floe  skimmings  has  an economic value estimated at
112/kg (52/lb).  The use of chemicals  will  increase  the  quantity  of
grease  removed from the waste water stream, but may reduce the value of
the grease because of the chemical contaminants.
Elementary biological treatment systems generally require more land than
Mechanically  assisted  systems  which  in  turn  increase  the   energy
consumption  and  cost  of  equipment  in achieving comparable levels of
waste reduction.  Some of the tertiary systems are interchangeable.  Any
of them can be used at the end of any of the secondary treatment systems
to achieve a required effluent quality.  Chlorination is included  if  a
disinfection treatment is required.  A final clarifier has been included
in  costing  out  all  biological  treatment  systems  that  generate  a
substantial sludge  volume;  e.  g.,  extended  aeration  and  activated
sludge.   The  clarifier  is  needed to reduce the solids content of the
final effluent.

The most feasible system for no discharge at this time is flood or spray
irrigation, or, in some cases, evaporation from a shallow pond.  Closing
the loop to a  total  water  recycle  or  reuse  system  is  technically
feasible, but costly.  The irrigation option does require large plots of
accessible  land—roughly  2.7 hectares/million liters (25 acres/million
gallons)  of waste water per day; and limited concentrations of dissolved
solids.  More detailed descriptions of each  treatment  system  and  its
effectiveness   are  presented  in  section  Vll-Control  and  Treatment
Technology.

Of all the  plants  in  the  study  sample  that  reported  waste  water
treatment,  55  percent  indicated  discharging raw waste to a municipal
treatment system.  Thirty-eight plants reported some  on-site  secondary
treatment.  Of the 38 plants, 63 percent used the anaerobic plus aerobic
lagoons  system.   This  system was used to treat large and small waste-
water streams alike, varying from 76,000 liters per day (0.2 MGD)  to 4.8
million liters per day (1.3 MGD).  The rest of  the  systems  listed  as
secondary  treatment  were  used  by  1, 2, or 3 plants each, except the
                                  125

-------
                              In-Plant^ContrQl^Cgsts

The cost of  installation of in-plant  controls  is primarily a  function  of
the specific plant situation.   Building  layout and   construction   design
will  largely  dictate what can be done,  how,  and at what cost j,n  regard
to  in-plant  waste  control  techniques.   No in-plant   control   costs  were
included  in the cost  estimates for Level 1 and 2 technologies, although
a dissolved  air flotation  system as primary treatment  was   included   in
the  Level   2 costs.   Rough approximations of  the range  of costs for the
in-plant controls  requiring capital equipment  are listed in  Table  11.
                Table 11.   In-Plant Control Equipment Cost Estimates
                Plant Area
                                 Item
                     Equipment Cost Range
                Pen wastes
                Blood handling
                Paunch handling
                Viscera handling

                Troughs

                Rend er ing



                Hide processing


                Hog Scald Tank
                Pickle & Curing
                solutions
                Water Conservation

                Water Conservation
Roof on pens

Manure sewer

Curbing & collection
  system

Blood dryer

Solids pumping
  system

Liquid screening &
  collection equip-
  ment
Localized catch basin
Surface condensers

Tankwater evaporator

Overflow collection
  & treatment

Water treatment &
reuse system

Solution collection,
treatment, reuse
system

Install spray nozzles

Press-to-open &
foot operated valves
$5000 - $10,000
$8 - $12/foot


$10,000 - $50,000

$30,000 - $50,000


$10,000 - $20,000


$5,000 - $10,000

$6,000 - $12,000

$5 - $10/foot

$15,000 - $20,000

$50,000 - $200,000

$5,000 - $20,000



 $10,000 - $25,000



 $10,000 - $30,000

 $5,000 - $10,000'


 $10,000 - $20,000
                                          128

-------
                        WASTE TREATMENT SYSTEMS

The waste treatment systems included in this report as  appropriate  for
use  on meat packing plant waste water streams can be used by all plants
in the industry.  The treatment systems will workr subject  to  specific
operating  constraints  or  limitations.   However,  the  cost  of  such
treatment systems may be uneconomical or beyond the economic  capability
of some plants.

The  waste  treatment  systems,  their  use,  and  the  minimum effluent
reduction associated with each are listed in Table  10.   The  dissolved
air  flotation  system  can  be used upstream of any secondary treatment
system.   When  operated  without  chemicals/  the   by-product   grease
recovered  in  the  floe  skimmings  has  an economic value estimated at
lliz/kg (5£/lb) .  The use of chemicals  will  increase  the  quantity  of
grease  removed from the waste water stream, but may reduce the value of
the grease because of the chemical contaminants.
Elementary biological treatment systems generally require more land than
Mechanically  assisted  systems  which  in  turn  increase  the   energy
consumption  and  cost  of  equipment  in achieving comparable levels of
waste reduction.  Some of the tertiary systems are interchangeable.  Any
of them can be used at the end of any of the secondary treatment systems
to achieve a required effluent quality.  Chlorination is included  if  a
disinfection treatment is required.  A final clarifier has been included
in  costing  out  all  biological  treatment  systems  that  generate  a
substantial sludge  volume;  e.  g.,  extended  aeration  and  activated
sludge.   The  clarifier  is  needed to reduce the solids content of the
final effluent.

The most feasible system for no discharge at this time is flood or spray
irrigation, or, in some cases, evaporation from a shallow pond.  Closing
the loop to a  total  water  recycle  or  reuse  system  is  technically
feasible, but costly.  The irrigation option does require large plots of
accessible  land—roughly  2.7 hectares/million liters  (25 acres/million
gallons)  of waste water per day; and limited concentrations of dissolved
solids.  More detailed descriptions of each  treatment  system  and  its
effectiveness   are  presented  in  Section  Vll-Control  and  Treatment
Technology.

Of all the  plants  in  the  study  sample  that  reported  waste  water
treatment,  55  percent  indicated  discharging raw waste to a municipal
treatment system.  Thirty-eight plants reported some  on-site  secondary
treatment.  Of the 38 plants, 63 percent used the anaerobic plus aerobic
lagoons  system.   This  system was used to treat large and small waste*
water streams alike, varying from 76,000 liters per day (0.2 MGD)  to 4.8
million liters per day (1.3 MGD).  The rest of  the  systems  listed  as
secondary  treatment  were  used  by  1, 2, or 3 plants each, except the
                                  125

-------
rotating biological contractor, which is now being  evaluated  at  full-
scale at one site.

Dissolved  air flotation is used as a primary treatment, either alone or
along with screens or a catch basin, by about 30 percent of  the  plants
in the sample.  About 5 percent use cjiemicals in the flotation system.

Chlorination  is a rare practice, according to the information collected
in the survey questionnaires; it appears to be used by about  5  percent
of the plants.

Other  than  sand filters and spray irrigation, there is no reported use
of any of the advanced treatment systems.  Sand  filters  are  used  for
secondary  treatment  in  Ohio  instead  of anaerobic lagoons, which are
discouraged by the Ohio Environmental  Protection  Administration.   The
few  spray  irrigation  systems  are  located  in  arid  regions  of the
Southwestern U.S.

Among the industry sufccategories,  for  which  we  have  specific  plant
information,  slaughterhouses  have  almost  twice as many air flotation
systems in  use  as  do  packinghouses.   Municipal  treatment  and  the
anaerobic  plus  aerobic  system for secondary treatment are used by the
bulk of the industry.  A breakdown of the sample by  subcategory  is  as
follows:
                  Secondary Treatment  by Each Subcategory,

Municipal
treatment , %
Anaerobic +
aerobic
lagoons, %
Other, %
TOTAL
Simple
Slaughter-
house
56
33
11
100%
Complex
Slaughter-
house
29
65
6
100%
Low-
Processing
Packing-
house
70
11
19
100%
High-
Processing
Packing-
house
59
14
27
100%
North Star
Sample of
Industry
55
28
17
100%
The  complex   slaughterhouses   have   an  unusually  low percentage  using
municipal treatment in comparison  with  the   other  three  subcategories.
The    plants    in    this   subcategory   are  typically  the  large-scale
slaughterhouses and they tend  to be  located close to the  animal  supply
rather  than  in cities,  thus often precluding municipal treatment.   This
tabulation  does not take into  account the large number of  small  plants
in   the  industry.    Depending on  the source of information,  the  total
                                  126

-------
number of plants in the industry  varies  from  4000  to  6000  and  the
approximate  percentage  of  small  plants varies from 85 to 90 percent.
However, these small plants account for only 10 percent or less  of  the
industry's  output  and,  probably, a somewhat smaller proportion of the
total waste water load.  Of the few small plants  for  which  data  were
available,  about  50 percent reported discharging waste water into city
sewers.  The remaining 50 percent  used  a  wide  variety  of  secondary
treatment  systems.   Based  on  all of the available information, it is
estimated that 50 percent of the small plants  use  municipal  treatment
facilities,  a  small percent probably dump raw waste into local streams
or use land disposal, and the remaining plants treat  their  own  waste.
Taken  as  single  point  sources  of  waste  water,  these small plants
represent an unknown but a very small fraction of the total wasteload on
receiving streams.
                                   127

-------
                          TREATMENT_AND_CONTROL_COSTS_

                              InrPlant Control  Costs

The cost of  installation of  in-plant  controls is primarily a function of
the specific plant situation.  Building layout and   construction  design
will  largely  dictate  what  can  be done, how, and at what  cost  in regard
to  in-plant  waste  control techniques.   No  in-plant   control  costs   were
included  in the cost estimates  for Level  1 and  2 technologies,  although
a dissolved  air flotation system as primary treatment  was  included  in
the  Level   2 costs.  Rough  approximations of the range of costs for the
in-plant controls  requiring  capital equipment are listed  in Table 11.
                Table 11.   In-Plant Control Equipment  Cost Estimates
                Plant Area
                                 Item
                    Equipment Cost Range
                Pen wastes



                Blood handling




                Paunch handling






                Viscera handling

                Troughs

                Rendering



                Hide processing


                Hog Scald Tank
                Pickle & Curing
                solutions
                Water Conservation

                Water Conservation
Roof on pens

Manure sewer

Curbing & collection
  system

Blood dryer

Solids pumping
  system

Liquid screening &
  collection equip-
  ment

Localized catch basin
Surface condensers

Tankwater evaporator

Overflow collection
  & treatment

Water treatment &
reuse system

Solution collection,
treatment, reuse
system

Install spray nozzles

Press-to-open &
foot operated valves
$5000 - $10,000

$8 - $12/foot


$10,000 - $50,000

$30,000 - $50,000


$10,000 - $20,000


$5,000 - $10,000


$6,000 - $12,000

$5 - $10/foot

$15,000 - $20,000

$50,000 - $200,000


$5,000 - $20,000



 $10,000 - $25,000




 $10,000 - $30,000

 $5,000 - $10,000


 $10,000 - $20,000
                                         128

-------
                 Secondary and Tertiary Treatment Costs

The total investment cost and annual cost  expressed  in  2/100  kg  LWK
(0/100  Ib LWK) are reported by subcategory for each secondary treatment
system, air flotation, and chlorination in Table 12.   These  costs  are
listed  on the same basis for each tertiary or advanced treatment system
in Table 13.

The annual costs of secondary treatment for all categories vary from 6.0
to 17.8 2/100 kg LWK  (2.7 to 8.1 2/100 Ib LWK),  excluding  the  highest
figures.   The  10-year   (1962-1971)  average  earnings  reported by the
American  Meat  Institute  are  750/100  kg   (342/100  Ib)  LWK.   These
estimated  annual  costs of waste treatment, which are very conservative
from an accounting viewpoint, represent between 8 and 24 percent of  the
10-year average earnings.  Presuming an acceptable recycle water quality
can  be  achieved  through  advanced  waste treatment, including ammonia
stripping, ion exchange, carbon adsorption, and chemical  precipitation,
the total estimated investment would vary from $700,000 to $1.6 million,
including  secondary treatment costs.  The annual costs would range from
26 to 550/100 kg LWK  (12 to 252/100 Ib LWK), or about 35 to  74  percent
of the lOyear average earnings.

No  discharge  could  be  achieved  by a spray irrigation system, incor-
porating partial treatment by ion exchange to reduce  dissolved  solids,
and would result in total costs between $270,000 and $544,000 and annual
costs between 13 and 242/100 kg LWK  (6 and 112/100 Ib LWK).


                      Investment costs Assumptions

The waste treatment system costs are based on the kill, waste water flow
and  BOD5  figures  listed previously for a "typical", but hypothetical,
plant  in  each  subcategory.   Investment  costs  for  specific   waste
treatment  systems  are largely dependent on the waste water flow.  Some
of the lagoon systems are designed on BOD5 loading, which has been shown
to increase with increased water use.

In averaging the waste water flow for each  subcategory,  it  was  found
that  one  standard deviation for three subcategories was 100 percent of
the average water flow, and 75 percent of  the  average  for  the  ether
subcategory.    The   capacity-cost   relationships  of  the  biological
treatment systems tend to flatten out as the capacity  approaches  3.785
million  liters  (1 million gallons) per day.  Thus, the investment cost
of treatment facilities will not change substantially with small changes
in water use, and interpolation or extrapolation of investment cost  for
different  capacities  is best made by the use of graphical presentation
and analysis of the data.  However, the capacity-cost relationships of
                                   129

-------
                              Table 12.  Secondary Waste Treatment System Costs

                                         Ilnvestment, $1000, Annual Costs, C/100 kg

                                         (C/100 Ib LWK)]
Waste Treatment
System
Pre-treatment and
Finishing Systems
Dissolved Air Flotation,
pr e- t r eatment
Chlorination,
finishing
Secondary Systems
Anaerobic + aerobic

Anaerobic + aerated +
aerobic
Aerated + aerobic

Anaerobic contact
process
Activated sludge

Anaerobic lagoon +
extended aeration
Anaerobic lagoon +
rotating biological
. contactor
Simple
Slaughterhouse
Total
Investment


65

7.5


238.

318.

210

410

438

308


198

Annual
Cost


2.4
(1.1)
0.44
(0.2)

10.4
(4.7)
13.9
(6.3)
10.6
(4.8)
16.3
(7.4)
17.2
(7.8)
14.3
(6.5)

10.6
(4.8)
Complex
S laught er hous e
Total
Investment


81

18.8


425.

564

432

520

1130

370


364

Annual
Cost


0.44
(0.2)
0.44
(0.2)

6.0
(2.7)
8.8
(4.0
7.5
(3.4)
7.3
(3-3)
14.3
(6.5)
8.6
(3.9)

6.6
(3.0)
Low-Pro cess ing
Packinghouse
Total
Investment


79

17.5


400.

531

398

500

1000

364


334

Annual
Cost


0.9
(0.4)
0.7
(0.3)

7.9
(3.6)
11.2
(5.1)
9.2
(4-2)
9.7
(4-4)
17.8
(8.1)
10.1
(4.6)

8.4
(3.8)
High-Processing
P ackinghous e
Total
Investment


86

21.2


475

623

500

570

1375

373


375

Annual
Cost


0.7
(0.3)
0.9
(0.4)

10.4.
(4.7)
15.0
(6.8)
12.8
(5.8)
12.6
(5.7)
27.1
(12.3)
13.2
(6.0)

10.6
(4.8)
OJ
o

-------
                               Table  13.  Advanced Waste Treatment System Costs
                                          Jlnvestment,  $1000; Annual  Costs,  0/100 kg LWK
                                           CC/100  Ib  LWK)J
Waste Treatment
System
Sand Filter

Micros trainer

Reverse osmosis

Elect rodialy sis
Ion exchange
Ammonia Stripping
Carbon adsorption
Chemical precipitation
Spray irrigation
Simple
Slaughterhouse
Total
Investment
140

105

640

275
57
75
238
65
91
Annual
Cost
6.0
(2.7)
6.6
C3.0)
28.4
(12.9)
33.8
(15.4)
4.4
(2.0)
5.3
(2.4)
13.2
(6.0)
8.8
(4.0)
4.2
(1.9)
Complex
Slaughterhouse
Total
Investment
195

146

1600

625
102
112.5
475
81
254
Annual
Cost
2.9
a. 3)
3.1
(1.4)
25.5
(11.6)
32.8
(14.9)
2.4
(1.1)
2.6
(1.2)
9.0
(4.1)
6.2
(2.8)
3.1
(1.4)
Low-Processing
Packinghouse
Total
Investment
188

140

1470

588
92
106
438
79
229
Annual
Cost
3.7
(1.7)
4.2
(1.9)
32.6
(14,8)
41.8
(19.0)
3.1
(1.4)
3.5
(1.6)
11.4
(5.2)
7.7
(3.5)
4.0
(1.8)
High-Processing
Packinghouse
Total
Investment
215

161

1860

700
122
119
537
86
297
Annual
Cost
4.8
(2.2)
5.3
(2.4)
46.2
(21.0)
60.0
(27.3)
4.4
(2.0)
4.2
(1.9)
15.8
(7.2)
11.0
(5.0)
5.3
(2.4)
OJ

-------
the advanced treatment systems are more similar to those  of  a  typical
process  industry,  with  a capacity ratio exponent between 0.6 and 0.8,
and cost estimates may be made using the exponential approach.   Because
of  industry  variability  and  cost  estimating approximation, specific
plants within each subcategory will  incur  waste  treatment  investment
costs  which  will differ from those reported for each subcategory by as
much as 50 to IOC percent, and perhaps more.

The investment cost data were collected from  the  literature,  personal
plant  visits,  equipment  manufacturers,  engineering  contractors, and
consultants.  These costs are "ball-park"  type  estimates  implying  an
accuracy  of  _+  20  to  25 percent.  Rarely is it minus.  All costs are
reported in August 1971 dollars.  Percentage factors were added  to  the
basic  system  estimate  for  design  and engineering (10X) and for con-
tingencies and omissions  (15%).  Land costs were estimated to  be  $2470
per hectare ($1000 per acre).

In  addition to the variation in plant water flows and BOD5 loadings and
the inherent  inaccuracy  in  cost  estimating,  one  additional  factor
further  limits  the probability of obtaining precise cost estimates for
waste treatment systems.  This  factor  was  reported  by  a  number  of
informed  sources  who  indicated  that municipal treatment systems will
cost up to 50 percent more  than  comparable  industrial  installations.
The  literature  usually  makes  no  distinction  between  municipal and
industrial installation in reporting investment costs.


                        Annual Costs Assumptions

The components of  annual  costs  include  capital  cost,  depreciation,
operating  and  maintenance costs, and energy and power costs.  The cost
of capital is estimated to be ten percent of the investment cost for the
meat packing industry.  This cost should be a weighted  average  of  the
cost  of  equity and of debt financing throughout the industry.  Neither
individual companies nor industry associations have a known  figure  for
this  cost.   Presuming  that  target  and realized return-on-investment
(ROi) or return-on-assets  (ROA) figures  incorporate  some  estimate  of
capital cost plus an acceptable profit or return, industry and corporate
reports  were  used  as a guide in selecting the 10 percent figure.  One
sample of companies reported earnings at 7.1 percent of total assets for
1971, 35 a recent business periodical reported earnings at 10.1  percent
of  invested  capital,  36 and general industry sources report corporate
target ROI or ROA figures at 12 to 15 percent for new ventures.  The ten
percent figure is probably conservative and thus tends to  result  in  a
high estimate of annual cost.

The  depreciation  component of annual cost was estimated on a straight-
line basis over the following lifetimes, with no salvage value:
                                   132

-------
    Land costs — not depreciated

    Cost of improvements for land intensive treatment — 25 years

    Simple treatment systems without complex process equipment:
    e.g., extended aeration, sand filter — 25 years

    Treatment systems requiring complex process equipment — 10 years

The operating and maintenance costs include the cost of one man-year  at
$4,20/hr for each typical secondary treatment system plus 50 percent for
burden,  supervision, etc.  One-half man-year was included in the annual
cost for each tertiary treatment plus the 50 percent burden, etc.  If  a
licensed  treatment plant operator is assumed, an additional annual cost
of $5000 would be reflected in operating costs.  General and maintenance
supplies, taxes,  insurance,  and  miscellaneous  operating  costs  were
estimated as 5 percent of the total investment cost per year for process
equipment based systems and 2.5 percent of the total investment cost for
land  intensive  waste  treatment  systems.  Specific chemical-use costs
were added when such materials were  consumed  in  the  waste  treatment
system.   By-product  income,  relative  to waste treatment was credited
only in the dissolved air  flotation  system  for  160  mg/1  of  grease
recovered  per  day and sold at $0.05 per pound, and in spray irrigation
for 13,400 kg of dry matter (hay or grass)  per hectare at $22/100 kg  (6
tons/acre at $20/ton) and one crop per season.


                          ENERGY REQUIREMENTS

The  estimated  electrical  energy  consumption  per plant based on 1967
Census of Manufacturers 37 data is as follows:

         Small plants — 0.72 million KWH per year

         Medium plants — 5.5 million KWH per year

         Large plants — 18.6 million KWH per year

The meat  packing  industry  consumes  relatively  small  quantities  of
energy.  The waste treatment systems require power primarily for pumping
and  aeration.   The  aeration horsepower is a function of the wasteload
and that for pumping depends on waste water flow rate.

Power consumption for waste treatment varies from 0.8 to 3.4 million KWH
per year for various secondary treatment systems.  This  consumption  is
between  10 and 40 percent of that indicated above for 1973.  The larger
plants with greater power consumption would tend toward the smaller per-
centage.  The total additional power consumption to achieve Level 1  and
                                   133

-------
Level  2 does not appear to raise serious power supply or cost questions
for the meat packing industry.

Thermal  energy  costs  roughly  equal  electrical  energy   costs   for
operations  within  the  industry.   Waste  treatment  systems impose no
significant addition to  the  thermal  energy  requirements  of  plants.
Waste  Water  can  be  reused in cooling and condensing service if it is
separated from the process waters in surface condensers.   These  heated
wastewaters  improve the effectiveness of anaerobic ponds which are best
maintained  at  90°F  or  more.   Improved  thermal   efficiencies   are
coincidentally achieved within a plant with this technique.

Waste Water treatment costs and effectiveness can be improved by the use
of energy and power conservation practices and techniques in each plant.
The  wasteload  increases  with  increased water use.  Reduced water use
therefore reduced the wasteload, pumping costs, and heating  costs,  the
last  of  which  can  be  further  reduced  by  water reuse as suggested
previously.


             NON-WATER PQLLQTIQN BY WASTE^TREATMENT_SYSTEMS

                              Solid Wastes

solid wastes are the most significant  non-water  pollutants  associated
with  the  waste  treatment  systems  applicable  to  the  meat  packing
industry.  Screening devices of various design and operating  principles
are  used  primarily  for  removal  of  large-scale solids such as hair,
paunch manure, and hog stomach contents from waste water.  These  solids
may have some economic value as inedible rendering material, or they may
be landfilled or spread with other solid wastes.

The solids material, separated from the waste water stream, that contain
organic  and  inorganic  matter,  including  those  added  to aid solids
separation, is called sludge.  Typically, it contains 95 to  98  percent
water  before  dewatering  or  drying.   Both  the primary and secondary
treatment systems generate some quantities of sludge; the quantity  will
vary by the type of system and is roughly estimated as follows:
                                  134

-------
Treatment System
Sludge Volume as Percent of raw
waste water volume
Dissolved air flotation

Anaerobic lagoon

Aerobic and aerated lagoons

Activated sludge

Extended aeration

Anaerobic contact process

Rotating biological contactor
Up to

Sludge accumulation in these
lagoons is usually not sufficient
to require removal at any time.

10 - 15%

 5 - 10SS

approximately 2%

unknown
The  raw  sludge can be concentrated, digested, dewatered, dried, incin-
erated, land-*filled or sub-surface injected on-site, or spread in sludge
holding ponds.  The sludge from any of the treatment systems, except air
flotation with polyelectrolyte chemicals added, is amenable  to  any  of
these sludge handling processes.

The  sludge  from  air  flotation with chemicals has proven difficult to
ciewater.  A dewatered  sludge  is  an  acceptable  land  fill  material.
Sludge  from  secondary treatment systems is normally ponded by the meat
industry plants on their own land or dewatered or digested  sufficiently
for  hauling  and  deposit in public land fills.  The final dried sludge
material can be safely used as an effective soil builder.  Prevention of
run-off is a critical factor in plant-site sludge holding ponds.   Costs
of  typical  sludge  handling  techniques  for  each secondary treatment
system generating sufficient quantities of sludge  to  require  handling
equipment are already included in the costs for these systems.


                             Air Pollution

Odors  are  the  only  significant air pollution problem associated with
waste treatment in the meat  packing  industry.   Malodorous  conditions
usually  occur  in  anaerobic  waste  treatment  processes  or localized
anaerobic environments within aerobic systems.  However, it is generally
agreed that anaerobic ponds will not create serious odor problems unless
the process water has a high sulfate content;  then  it  most  assuredly
will.   Sulfate waters are definitely a localized condition varying even
from well to well  within  a  specific  plant.   In  northern  climates,
however,  the  change  in  weather in the spring may be accompanied by a
period of increased odor problems.
                                   135

-------
The anaerobic.pond odor potential is somewhat unpredictable as evidenced
by a few plants that have odor  problems  without  sulfate  waters.    In
these  cases a Cover and collector of the off-gas from the pond controls
odor.  The off-gas is then burned in a flare.

The other potential odor generators in the waste treatment are tanks and
process equipment items for the anaerobic contact process that  normally
generate  methane.   However,  with  the  process confined to a specific
piece of equipment it is relatively easy to confine and control odors by
collecting and burning the off-gases.  The high heating value  of  these
gases  makes it worthwhile and standard practice to recover the heat for
use in the waste treatment process.

Odors-have been generated  by  some  air  flotation  systems  which  are
normally  housed  in  a  building, thus localizing, but intensifying the
problem.  Minimizing the unnecessary holdup of any skimmings or  grease-
containing solids has been suggested as a remedy.

Odors  can, best  be  controlled by elimination, at the source, in pref-
erence to treatment for odor control which remains largely  unproven  at
this time.


          '                        Noise

The  only  material  increase  in noise within a packing plant caused by
waste treatment is that caused by the installation of an  air  flotation
system  or  aerated  lagocns  with  air blowers.  Large pumps and an air
compreaser are part of an air flotation system.  The  industry  normally
houses such a system in a low-cost building; thus, the substantial noise
generated  by  an air flotation system is confined and perhaps amplified
by the installation practices.  All air compressors,  air  blowers,  and
large  pumps  in use on intensively aerated treatment systems, and other
treatment systems as well, may produce noise levels  in  excess  of  the
Occupational  Safety  and Health Administration standards.  The industry
must consider these standards in solving its waste pollution problems.
                                   136

-------
                               SECTION IX

               EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE
              APPLICATION OF THE BEST PRACTICABLE CONTROL
                     TECHNOLOGY CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
                    EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES

                              Introduction

The effluent limitations which must be achieved July  1,  1977,  are  to
specify  the  degree of effluent reduction attainable through the appli-
cation of the Best Practicable Control Technology  Currently  Available.
Best  Practicable  Control  Technology  Currently Available is generally
based upon the average of the best existing  performance  by  plants  of
various  sizes,  ages, and unit processes within the industrial category
and/or subcategory.  This average is not based upon  a  broad  range  of
plants  within  the  meat  packing  industry, but based upon performance
levels achieved by exemplary plants.

Consideration must also be given to:

    o    The total cost of application of technology in relation to
         the effluent reduction benefits to be achieved from such
         application;

    o    The size and age of equipment and facilities involved;

    o    The processes employed;

    o    The engineering aspects of the application of various types
         of control techniques;

    o    Process changes;

    o    Non-water quality environmental impact (including energy
         requirements).

Also, Best Practicable Control Technology Currently Available emphasizes
treatment facilities at the end of a manufacturing process, but includes
the control technologies within the process itself when the  latter  are
considered to be normal practice within an industry,

A  further  consideration  is  the  degree  of  economic and engineering
reliability  which  must  be  established  for  the  technology  to   be
"currently  available".   As  a  result of demonstration projects, pilot
plants and general use, there must exist a high degree of confidence  in
                                  137

-------
the  engineering  and  economic  practicability of the technology at the
time of start of construction of installation of the control facilities.
       EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE APPLICATION OF
       BEST PRACTICABLE CONTROL TECHNOLOGY CURRENTLY AVAILABLE

Based on the information contained in Sections III through VIII of  this
report,  a  determination  has  been  made  that the quality of effluent
attainable  through  the  application  of  the  Best  Pollution  Control
Technology   Currently  Available  is  as  listed  in  Table   14.   The
production basis for  the  basic  limitations  in  this  and  subsequent
sections is the maximum average output over any 30 day period, i.e., the
"maximum  month."   A  number  of  plants  in  the  industry  which have
biological treatment  systems  for  which  effluent  quality  data  were
available are meeting these standards.

Exceptional  cases  may  arise occasionally that require adjustment.  An
example is a plant that processes a large volume of hides or blood  from
other  plants  in  addition  to its own.  Adjustments can be made to the
effluent guidelines on the basis of information  contained, in  Sections
IV,  V,  and  VII  for  BODS  and suspended solids.  The adjustments for
exceptions are listed in Table 15.

              IDENTIFICATION OF BEST PRACTICABLE CONTROL
                    TECHNOLOGY CURRENTLY AVAILABLE

Best Pollution Control  Technology  Currently  Available  for  the  meat
packing  industry involves biological waste treatment following in-plant
solids and  grease  recovery  steps.   To  assure  that  treatment  will
successfully  achieve  the  limits specified, certain in-plant practices
should be followed.
    1.   Reduce water use by shutting off water when not in use,
         practicing extensive dry clean-up before washing, and
         exercising strict management control over housekeeping and
         water use practices.  Water use should be controlled at
         least to the following values:
   Class of Plant
    Simple slaughterhouse
    Complex slaughterhouse
    Low-processing packinghouse
    High-processing packinghouse*
liters/1000 kg LWK
      5,416
      7,497
      8,333
     12,495
gal/1000 Ib LWK
   650
   900
  1000
  1500
*This is for an assumed mix of kill and processing of about 0.65 kg
processed meat products/kg XWK.
                                   138

-------
    Table 14.  Basic Effluent Limitations for 1 July 1977 Shown as the
               Average of Daily Values for any Period of Thirty
               Consecutive Days (1)

Plant (2)
Subcategory

Simple
Slaughterhouse
Complex
Slaughterhouse
Low-Processing
Packinghouse
High-Processing
Packinghouse
B°D5
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK

0.12
0.21
0.17
0.24
Suspended
Solids
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK

0.20
0.25
0.24
0.31
Grease
kg/ 1000 kg
LWK

0.06
0.08
0.08
0.13
The values for BOD5^ and suspended solids are for average plants; i.e., plants
with a ratio of average weight of processed meat products to average LWK of
0.55.  Adjustments can be made for high-processing packinghouses at other
ratios according to the following equations:

          kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK = 0.21 + 0.23 (V - 0.4)
          kg SS/1000 kg LWK   = 0.28 + 0.30 (V - 0.4)
              where Y = kg processed meat products/kg LWK, and is 0.4 or greater
  (1)  Maximum limitations for a period of one day may be determined by a
       multiple of two times the 30 consecutive day average.

  (2)  For all subcategories pH should range between 6.0 and 9.0 and fecal
       coliform bacteria should be controlled to 400 counts/100 ml at any time,
                                     139

-------
Table 15.  Adjustment Factors for Exceptions In Operations
           in any Plant Subcategory—1977
Exceptional Practice
Processing hides from other
plants in addition to own:
  Defleshing, washing,
  curing

Processing blood from other
plants in addition to own:
  Steam coagulation and
  screening, sewering
  water

Rendering material from
other plants in addition
to own:
  Wet and low-temperature,
  sewering water

  Dry
                                     Adjustment Factors
                                     BODS
             kg/kkg  ELWK
                 0.02
                 0.02
                 0.03

                 0.01
Suspended
 Solids

 kg/kkg ELWK
    0.04
    0.04
    0.06

    0.02
Incremental
Adjustment
to Guidelines,
(Adjustment   (Total weight of source animals* as kkg ELWK
  Factor)    x           (Plant LWK in 1000's kg)
*Source animals are those animals killed at another location from which the
 additional hides, blood, etc., originate.  If the weight of the source
 animals equivalent to the materials being processed is unknown it can be
 estimated by the use of the following:

     For blood:
     Equivalent liveweight killed  (ELWK) -  (liters of blood) x  (0.028)
     or (gal of blood) x  (0.108) in kkg

     Equivalent liveweight killed  (ELWK) -  (kg of blood) x  (0.029 or
     (Ib of blood) x (0.013) in kkg

     For rendering material;

     Equivalent liveweight killed  (ELWK) -  (kg of rendering materials x
                                            (0.0067) or  (Ib of rendering
                                            materials x  (0.003)

     For cattle hides:
      Equivalent  liveweight killed  (ELWK) -  (number  of  hides) x  (0.45)  in kkg
                              140

-------
The above values of water use represent the averages for the
subcategories; several of the exemplary plants were found to,
have raw waste water flowrates at or below this average. ,
They vary because of differences in water               . • .
requirements and, to a lesser extent, practices for subcategories.
It is possible for each subcategory to achieve its flow rate
without large in-plant modifications; however, many plants
will require greatly improved water control and housekeeping practices,

    2.   In-plant recovery systems should include, as a minimum, a
         gravity catch basin with at least a 30-minute detention time;
         further addition of air flotation is more effective.

    3.   Blood recovery should be practiced extensively, with all
         major bleeding areas curbed and with separate drains to
         blood collection tanks.  If blood is coagulated, blood
         water should be evaporated.
    H.   Water from low temperature rendering should be evaporated.
    5.   Barometric leg evaporators which tend to foam, such!as for
         tankwater evaporation, should be equipped with foafn breakers
         and demisters,                                 /;  ^-.„ •

    6.   Uncontaminated cooling water should not be discharged to
         the secondary waste treatment system.       /  '• ;  ' •- '
    7.   Paunch contents should be dumped without using water.

The above in-plant practices, in addition to good housekeeping, can
readily produce a raw waste load below that cited as average in Section V,
With an average waste load, the following secondary treatment systems
are able to meet the stated guidelines:

    1.   Anaerobic lagoon + aerated •*• aerobic  (shallow) lagoon
    2.   Anaerobic lagoon + extended aeration
    3.   Anaerobic contact process + aerobic  (shallow)  lagoons
    4.   A solids removal stage and chlorination may be required as
         a final process.


                     RATIONALE FOR THE SELECTIQN_OF
        BEST PRACTICABLEI COJTROL^TECHNCLOGY CURRENTLY AVAILABLE

Age and Size of Equipment and Facilities
The industry has generally modernized its plants as new methods that are
economically attractive have been introduced.  NO  relationship  between
                                   141

-------
age  of  production plant and effectiveness of its pollution control was
found.  Also, size is not a significant factor, even though plants  vary
widely  in  size.   Small plants are not mechanized to the extent of the
rest of the industry; still  they  are  able  to  achieve  at  least  as
effective  control  as larger plants.  This is partly because the small-
scale of operation permits options for simple paunch viscera  and  blood
disposal,  with  small  low-cost in-plant equipment that are not open to
large operations because of the immense volume of materials concerned.


Total Cost of Application in Relation to Effluent Reduction Benefits

Based on the information contained in Section VIII of this  report,  the
industry  as a whole would have to invest an estimated amount of $50-$70
million to achieve the effluent limitations described.  This amounts  to
a  cost  of  about  $2,355  for installed capacity of one million kg LWK
(£1,069 per one million Ib)  per year.  The cost increase will amount  to
about  $0,345/1000  kg  LWK ($0.157/1000 Ib LWK).  Based on an estimated
overall investment of $1.7 billion, the maximum increase  in  investment
would  be about 3 percent.  This also represents about 20 percent of the
capital expenditures reported for 1971. 3*

All plants discharging to  streams  can  implement  the  Best  Pollution
control  Technology Currently Available,  The technology is not affected
by different processes used in the plants.


Engineering Aspects of Control Technique Applications

The specified level of technology is practicable  because  it  is  being
practiced  by plants representing a wide range of plant sizes and types.
The parameters pH and fecal coliform are limited for  all  subcategories
as discussed under "Simple Slaughterhouses."


Simple Slaughterhouses

The  BODS guideline was taken as the performance achieved by four plants
in the subcategory.  This performance was found to be 0.12 kilograms per
1000 kilograms live weight killed  (kg/kkg LWK) using all data available.
Two plants that were very unusual in operation came in the  same  range,
but  were  not  included  in  the  average  since  performance routinely
exceeded even the better treatment systems used to  derive  limitations.
A  seventh  plant  (but one that discharged to a municipal system) had an
extremely low raw waste load and, with  the  less  than  an  outstanding
biological  treatment,  would  have readily met the requirement.  Of the
plants used for the limitation, all had final BODS  values  near  to  or
better than the standard.
                                  142

-------
The  suspended  solids  content varied much more widely among the plants
studied, with an average of 0.20 kg/1000 kg LWK.  Of these  plants,  two
were  particularly  high  in  suspended  solids—between  0.3  and 0.4 A
suspended solids level that is higher than the BODS  level  is  normally
encountered  for  biological  treatment systems particularly those which
are highly efficient in BOD  reduction.   As  a  further  check  on  the
veracity  of  this  number it was determined that three of. the exemplary
biological treatment  systems  averaged  about  97  percent  removal  of
suspended solids.  When this factor was applied to the average suspended
solids  of the raw waste load for the sutcategory of 5.6 kg/1000 kg LWK,
the result was 0.17 kg/1000 kg Iwk.  Plant operation with a lower  than-
average  raw waste load and with a similar treatment system would give a
suspended solids value well within the guideline.

The average grease content in the treated effluent from the five  plants
was below the range of the reliability of the analytical method used for
grease  (10  mg/1) .   This limit would give a grease value of about 0.03
kg/1000 kg LWK.  From  the  removal  efficiency  standpoint;  98  to  99
percent  was  achieved  in  the better plants.  These efficiencies would
reduce the grease in the average raw waste to the limit specified.

Control of pH in the range of 6.0 to 9.0 is as commonly  encountered  in
raw waste and treated effluents; control of fecal coliform to 400 counts
per  100  mg/1  is  readily  accomplished < by  reasonable application of
disinfection technology such as chlorination.
Complex Slauc

BOD5 limitations for complex slaughterhouses are based upon averages  of
actual  effluent  data  for  five  plants in the subcategory.  Suspended
solids proved quite variable for plants in this subcategory; in  several
instances  raw  wastes  at  the  same or lower suspended solids level as
simple slaughterhouses were not as effectively removed.  The  limitation
is  at  a  level  achieved by one plant in this subcategory, five plants
with similar raw wastes in the simple  slaughterhouse  subcategory,  and
within 25-30 percent of the suspended solids for two other plants in the
subcategory.   The  limit  is  approximately 35 mg/1 in concentration as
further verified by using the prescribed limitation and the  recommended
flowrate of 900 gal/1000 Ib Iwk.

The  grease  level  was  determined  from the average of the five grease
values reported by the best 13 complex  slaughterhouses  for  which  the
average raw waste load was 2.7 kg grease/1000 kg LWK.  One plant readily
met  the  limitation  for  grease while three 6thers are very close even
with raw waste grease loads.  Specific field tests showed one  plant  to
be  below the analytical test limit for grease, while questionnaire data
showed that another plant was just slightly over this amount.
                                  143

-------
Low-processing Packinghouges

As outlined in Section V, BOD and suspended solids vary  primarily  with
kill  rather  than  processing rate.  As a consequence, limits for these
parameters in this subcategory may be partially verified by knowing kill
rates  in  low  processing  packinghouses   and   simple   and   complex
slaughterhouses.    Since  kill rates for this subcategory typically fall
between those  for  the  slaughterhouse  subcategories,  raw  waste  and
effluent  BOD  and suspended solids would show the same relationships if
the same treatment technology were applied.  Available data revealed the
relationship to be expected  even  though  treatment  systems  for  this
subcategory  showed rather poor performance.  However, one plant already
meets the limits for both parameters  and  the  addition  of  mechanical
aeration  and  measures  to  reduce raw waste loads would readily permit
four more plants to meet the limits.  No correction was applied for  the
amount  of processing in this subcategory because the ratio of processed
products to LWK was so low that any adjustment was not significant.  The
value obtained for grease corresponded to  the  level  achieved  by  two
plants,  both practicing reasonable grease recovery and using biological
treatment.
High-Processing;Packinghouses

The BODS and suspended solids effluent limits were derived  by  applying
the  exemplary treatment technology proven in use by plants in the other
three subcategories to the average raw waste values given in Table 5 for
this subcategory.  This resulted in effluent limit  values  of  0.24  kg
BOD5/1000  LWK  and  0.31  kg suspended solids/1000 kg LWK; these values
apply to a high-processing packinghouse that  has  a  ratio  of  average
weight  of  processed products to average LWK of 0.55.  However, because
the amount of processed products relative to the LWK varies considerably
for highprocessing packinghouses, adjustments  for  BOD5  and  suspended
solids  were  developed  for  plants having a ratio of average weight of
processed products to average LWK other than  0.55.   These  adjustments
are  presented;at the bottom of Table 14.  The adjustment equations were
derived from two equations for predicting the total BOD5  and  suspended
solids  in  the  raw  effluent  from  the  LWK  and  amount of processed
products, and by assuming exemplary  treatment  removals  for  BOD5  and
suspended  solids  of  98.5  and  97  percent,  respectively.   The  two
predicting equations were developed from a multiple regression  analysis
of  the  combined  
-------
reliability  for  the  analytical  method  for  the grease determination
specific  data  were  available  for  only  two  plants;  one  met   the
limitations,  one  would  me^t  t^he  limit  with reduced flowrates since
concentrations is the latter plant effluent were very low.

ADJUSTMENT.5 IN_gFgL^gNT_GUIDELINES FOR EXCEPTIONAI* CASES

Instances may arise in plants in any of the subcategories which  justify
adjustments  in  the  recommended effluent limits.  The exceptions occur
when certain materials—hides, blood and offal—are brought into a plant
for processing.  In these cases, the effluent limitations for BOD5,  SSf
or  other  parameter can be increased by an incremental adjustment based
on the adjustment factors listed in Tables 15 and 17 and the  amount  of
outside material processed.

The  incremental  adjustments for a given waste parameter in a plant are
determined by first calculating the  estimated  additional  daily  waste
load  for  each  exceptional  practice  in  units  of  1000 kilograms of
equivalent liveweight killed  (ELWK)   and  then  normalizing   (dividing)
these  values  by  the  actual LWK for the plant.  Adding the sum of the
incremental adjustments  for  outside  materials  to  the  corresponding
effluent  limitation  for  production  due  to on-site slaughtering will
yield the adjusted effluent limit for plants with exceptional practices.
This can be expressed as follows:
        (AEL)
 where  AEL
        BEL
        IA
 (BEL) +     (IA)
Adjusted effluent limit
Basic effluent limitation  (on-site kill)
Incremental adjustment  (outside sources)
        IA   = (adjustment factor from Table 15) x
                                        (total weight of animals
                                       in 1000 kg from which
                                       outside source materials
                                       came or ELWK)	
                                            (Plant LWK in 1000~k<
Following are examples illustrating the calculation of adjusted effluent
Example 1

Determine the adjusted effluent limit for  BOD5  and  SS  for  a  simple
slaughterhouse with a kill of 1500 head of cattle per day and processing
an  additional  1000  hides  from  an  outside  source.   From Table 15,
adjustment factors are 0.02 for BOD5 and 0.04 for suspended solids.
                                   145

-------
Assumption:  454 kg  (1000 pounds)/head cattle

Calculations:

        IA for BOD5 because of additional 1000 hides

        =  0.02 kg BOD5     1000 hides
           	  x  1 hide/head	x 454 kg/head
           100C kg LWK      1500 head    x 454 kg/head
                                         = 0.013
                    kg BOD5
                    1000 kg LWK
From Table 14, the Basic Effluent Limit  (BEL)  for  BOD5  for  a  simple
slaughterhouse  is  0.12  kg  BOD5/1COO  kg  LWK.   Hence,  the adjusted
effluent limit for BOD5 is

        AEL =  (0.12) +  (0.013)  kg_BOD5
                                1000 kg LWK

            = 0.133 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK

Similarly, for suspended solids

        IA  =   0.04 kcr SS   x   1000 hides
0.04 kg SS   x
1000 kg LWK
                                 1 hide/head
                                  1500~head
x 454 kg/head   = 0.027 kg SS
	   1000~kg LWK
  x  454 kg/head
From Table 14, BEL for SS - 0.20

Then

        AEL =  (0.20 + 0.027)
            =  0.227 ka_SS/1000 kg LWK

Example 2

Determine the  AEL for BOD5 for a low-processing packinghouse that  kills
1500 head of cattle and also does dry rendering of an additional 136,000
kg of raw by-products  (offal and bone) from an outside source.

Assumption:    There  are  approximately  68  kg   (150 pounds) of raw by-
products per head of cattle.  For an assumed live  weight  per  head  of
cattle  of 454 kg, fifteen percent of the LWK is the estimated amount of
raw by-products per  head  of  cattle.   Actually,  this  is  a  liberal
estimate  since  a typical range of percentages is 10 to 12.5 percent of
-the LWK for cattle.  For baby beef the percentages range from  9  to  14
percent;  calves,  11.5  to  15  percent;  hogs,  from  8  to 35 percent
(depending strongly on the amount of fat trimming); and sheep, from  7.5
to  10  percent,
                                  146

-------
From Table 15, adjustment factors are 0.01 for BOD5 and 0.02 for
suspended solids.
Calculations:

        IA for dry rendering
            1000 kg LWK

            0.013 kg BOD 5
            1000 kg LWK
        j.36JLQOO_kg offal_ x  454 rkg
        68 kg offal/head	head
        1500 head x 454 kg/head
From Table 14, BEL for BOD5 = 0.21.  Then, AEL = 0.21 + 0.013
- 0.223 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK

Comments:  Note in Example 2 that the estimated number  of  cattle  from
which  the  136,000  kg of offal came is 2000.  To determine the AEL for
suspended solids, etc. simply use the adjustment factor and BEL  for  SS
or other parameters illustrated for BOD5.

Example 3

Determine  the  AEL for BODjj for an average high-processing packinghouse
killing 700 cattle and 1000 hogs and processing  1000  additional  hides
and  23,550  liters  of  blood from an outside beef slaughterhouse.  The
blood is processed by steam coagulation,  screening,  and  sewering  the
blood water.

Assumptions:  Cattle weigh 454 kg/head  (1000 Ib)
              Hogs weigh 102 kg/head <225 Ib)
              15.7 liters     15.7 kg of blood per head of cattle

From Table 15, adjustment factors are;
              for blood processing, 0.02
              for hide processing, 0.02
        IA =
0.02 kg BODS     23,550 1 blood
1000_kg_LWK~	15.7 I/head	x 454 kg/head
700 head x 454 kg7head + 1000 head x 102 kg/head
        IA for blood =0.02   1500 x 454
                   	=  CUQ324_kqT_BpD5
      700 x 454 + 1000~x 102    1000 kg LWK
        IA for the 10CO hides

                            x   10.00 hides   x   454 kg LWK
                                  147

-------
             1000 kg LWK
700 head x
                      1 hide/head
head
                              kg LWK   + 1000 head x 102 k.g LWK
                              head^                      head
        IA      = 0.0216 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK
          hides

From Table 14, BEL = 0.24 kg BOD5/100 kg LWK
Adding these two lA's to the BEL for this,

        AEL = BEL + IA       + IA
                      blood      hides
            - C.24 + 0.032 + 0.022
        AEL = 0.294 kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK
Process Changes

Significant  in-plant changes will not be needed by the vast majority of
plants to meet the limits specified.  Many plants will need  to  improve
their  water conservation practices and housekeeping, both responsive to
good plant management control.  Some plants may find  that  addition  of
improved gravity separation systems, such as air flotation with chemical
precipitation, may enable them to meet the guidelines more readily,


Non-Water Quality Environmental Impact

The  major impact when the option of an activated sludge-type of process
is used to achieve the limits will be the problem  of  sludge  disposal.
Nearby land for sludge disposal may be necessary—in some cases a sludge
digester (stabilizer) may offer a solution.  Properly operated activated
sludge-type  systems  should permit well conditioned sludge to be placed
in small nearby soil plots for drying without great difficulty.

Another problem is the  odor  that  emits  periodically  from  anaerobic
lagoons.  Covering with a plastic sheet and burning the off-gas offers a
potential  solution  to  this  problem*   It is necessary to avoid high-
sulfate water supplies.  The  odor  problem  can  be  avoided  with  all
aerobic systems.

It  is  concluded  that  no  new  kinds of impacts will be introduced by
application of the best current technology.
                                   148

-------
                               SECTION X

       EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH THE APPLICATION OF
        THE BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY ECONOMICALLY ACHIEVABLE'--
                    EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS GUIDELINES

                              INTRODUCTION

The effluent limitations which must be achieved no later  than  July  1,
1983,  are  not  based  on  an average of the best performance within an
industrial category, but are determined by  identifying  the  very  best
control  and  treatment  technology  employed by a specific;point source
within the industrial category or subcategory, or by one industry  where
it  is readily transferable tc another.  A specific finding must be made
as to the availability of control measures and  practices  to  eliminate
the  discharge  of  pollutants,  taking  into  account  -the cost of such
elimination.                                               • :  .
                    i

Consideration must also be given to;

    o    The age of the equipment and facilities involved;

    o    The process employed;

    o    The engineering aspects of the application of various types
         of control techniques;                            .   . •

    o    Process changes;

    o    The cost of achieving the effluent reduction resulting
         from application of the technology;

    o    Non-water quality environmental impact (including energy
         requirements).

Also, Best Available Technology Economically Achievable  emphasizes  in-
process  controls  as well as control or additional treatment techniques
employed at the end of the production process.

This level of technology considers those  plant  processes  and  control
technologies  which,  at  the pilot plant, semi-works, and other levels,
have demonstrated both technological performances and economic viability
at  a  level  sufficient  to  reasonably  justify  investing   in   such
facilities.   It  is  the  highest degree cf control technology that has
been achieved or has been demonstrated to be capable of  being .Designed
for  plant  scale  operation  up  to  and  including  "no  discharge" of
pollutants.   Although  economic  factors   are   considered   in ;  this
development,  the costs for this level of control are intended to be the
                                  149

-------
top-of—the-line of current technology, subject to limitations imposed by
economic and engineering feasibility.


          EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE THROUGH.APPLICATION OF
         THE BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY ECONOMICALLY ACHIEVABLE

Based on the information contained in Sections III through VII  of  this
report.
determination  has  been  made  that the quality of effluent
attainable through the application  of  the  Best  Available  Technology
Economically  Achievable  is  as  listed in Table 16.  The technology to
achieve these goals is generally available, although  it  may  not  have
been applied as yet to a packing plant or on a full scale.

Exceptional  cases may arise occasionally that require adjustment in the
guidelines—these  include  the  processing  of  large   quantities   of
materials (e.g., hides and blood) from ether plants in addition to their
own.   Adjustments can be made on the basis of the information contained
in Sections  IV,  V,  and  VII  for  BODS  and  suspended  solids.   The
adjustments  for  exceptions are listed in Table 17.  Kjeldahl nitrogen/
ammonia, phosphorus, and nitrite-nitrate levels which are  concentration
limited are unaffected.

It  should  also  be  pointed  out  that  a  packer should consider land
disposal, and hence no discharge, for  1983.   where  suitable  land  is
available,  evaporation  or  irrigation  is  an  option that not only is
recommended from the discharge viewpoint, but also will usually be  more
economical than the system otherwise required.


            IDENTIFICATION OF THE.BEST AVAILABLE.TECHNOLOGY
                        ECONOMICALLY ACHIEVABLE

The  Best  Available  Technology  Economically  Achievable includes that
listed  under  the  Best  Practicable   Control   Technology   Currently
Available.   In  addition,  it  includes  improved pretreatment, such as
dissolved air flotation with pH control and  chemical  flocculation;  an
ammonia   control   step  which  may  involve  ammonia  stripping  or  a
nitrification-denitrification sequence; and a sand filter or  equivalent
following secondary treatment.
                                  150

-------
                Table 16.   Recommended Effluent Limitation Guidelines for July 1,  1983
                           Shown as the Average of Daily Values  for any Period of  Thirty
                           Consecutive Days

Plant
Subcategory (1)
Simple
Slaughterhouse
Complex
Slaughterhouse
Low-Pro c e ss ing
Packinghouse
High-Processing
Packinghouset
BOD-
kg/1000 kg
LWK
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.08
Suspended
Solids
kg/1000 kg
LWK
0.05
0.07
0.06
o.io
Grease
mg/1
10
10
10
10
Ammonia
as 'N**
mg/1
4
4
4
4
**For waste treatment at this level, concentration becomes limiting,                            averaee
 tThe values for BOD5 and suspended solids are for average plants;  t-.fi.,  plants with ratios of  average
  weight of processed meat products to average UKofV.55,   Adjustments  can be made for Mgh-processmg
  packinghouses at other ratios according to the following equations:

       kg BOD5/1000 kg LWK = U.07 + 0.08  (y - 0.4)

       kg SS/1000 kg LWK = 0.09 + 0.10  (Y - 0.4)
           where y = kg processed meat products/kg LWK, and is 0.4 or greater

 (l)For all  subcategories PH  should  range between 6.0 and  9.0 and fecal coliform
    bacteria should be controlled  to 400 ccfunts/100 ml at any time.

-------
                  Table 17.  Adjustments for Exceptions in All
                             Plant Subcategories—1983 in kg/kkg ELWK
Exceptional Practice
Processing blood from other
plants in addition to own:
Steam coagulation and
screening , sewering
water
Rendering material from
other plants in addition
to own:
Wet and low-temperature,
sewering water
Dry
Adjustment Factors
BOD5
0.007


0.01
0.003
Suspended
Solids
0.013


0.02
0.007
Incremental
Adjustment
to Guideline,
kg/1000 kg
(Adjustment   (Total weight of source animals* as kkg ELWK.
  Factor)    X           (Plant LWK in 1000's kg)
*Source animals are those animals killed at another location from which the
 additional hides, blood, etc. , originate.  If the weight of the source
 animals equivalent to the materials being processed is unknown it can be
            / tine use of Che following.
  For blood:

  Equivalent  liveweight killed (ELWK)
  (gal of  blood )  x (0.108)  in kkg

 Equivalent  liveweight killed (ELWK)
  (Ib of blood) x  (0.013)  in kkg

  For Rendering material:

  Equivalent  liveweight killed (ELWK)
  in kkg

  For cattle  hides:
  Equivalent  liveweight  killed  (ELWK)
  in kkg
                        (liters  of  blood)  x  (0.028)  or
                        (kg of blood) x  (0.029  or
                        (kg of rendering materials x  (0.0067)  or
                        (Ib of rendering materials x  (0,003)
                     -  (number of hides) x  (0.45)
                                  152

-------
Tn-plant controls and modifications are also required to achieve
the specified levels.  These include:

    o    Segregation of grease-bearing from nongrease-bearing waste
         streams;

    o    Water control systems and procedures to reduce water use
         to about 50 percent of that listed in Section IX;

    o    Processing or outside disposal of entire wet pauch contents
         or rendering of unopened paunch,

    o    Installation of surface (or comparable)  systems for
         heat exchangers and evaporators;
         Segregation, clean-up, and reuse of pickling and brine solutions

    o    Provision for collection of excess solutions;

    o    Installation of dry rendering operations;

    o    General elimination of viscera washing operations;

    o    Design for extensive use of troughs under carcass conveying
         lines;

    o    Instigation and continuous enforcement of meticulous dry
         clean-up and materials recovery procedures.
    o    Elimination of steam coagulation of blood and installation
         of whole blood drying equipment.

To  reduce  the  water  use  to  the required levels, several changes in
normal plant operations may be required.  Push-to-open valves need to be
used wherever possible.  Spray nozzles can be redesigned for lower water
flow.  Automatic valves that close when the water is not in  use  should
be   installed;  examples  are  in  carcass  washers  and  for  washdown
operations.  Automatic level control should  be  used  in  pen  watering
troughs.   Pens  should  be  covered  in  areas  where rain and snow are
significant; wood chips should be used  for  bedding  and  dry  clean-up
procedures should be used.

Water  reuse should be practiced, reusing water for lower quality needs.
For example, carcass washing water can be reused for hog  dehairing  and
lagoon  water  can  be  reused  for  cooling waters (this latter has the
advantage of heating a lagoon for greater biological activity).

Dissolved solids can be minimized by changing  some  current  practices.
Excess  cure  solutions should be collected immediately for direct reuse
or treatment to recover solutions.    Concentrated  brine  overflow  from
hide   curing  should  be  segregated  for  salt  recovery,  perhaps  by
                                  153

-------
evaporation.  Salt should not be used on floors as an antislip material;
other methods such as steel or rubber antislip  mats  are  available  to
counteract  this  problem.  Reducing carcass and head washing water will
reduce the body fluids (and thus the salts)  washed  into  the  sewer  in
this step.

If  suitable land is available, land disposal is the best technology;, it
is no discharge.  Depending on the amount and type of  land,  the  above
in-plant  techniques  and  primary  treatment,  including  dissolved air
flotation with pH control, may be adequate  before  discharging  to  the
land.   On  the other hand, a secondary treatment system may be required
before disposal to soil.   Any of the systems mentioned in Section IX, or
even simpler ones, are suitable.  The  potential  problem  of  dissolved
solids  in  irrigation  systems  can  usually  be  avoided by minimizing
dissolved solids as described above; in some cases a part of the  stream
may need to be treated by ion exchange.

Technology  is  available  for  small  plants  for  no discharge via the
irrigation or evaporation or other land disposal  methods.   Interim  or
remedial  concepts  include  irrigation  or  evaporation  or  other land
disposal methods.  Interim or remedial concepts include  a  septic  tank
used  with a drainfield or large cesspool.  Strict in-plant controls are
readily managed to minimize the raw waste load.

                     RATIONALE FOR .SELECTION OF THE
                BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY ECONOMICALLY ACHIEVABLE

                Age and Size of Equipment and Facilities

Neither size nor age are found to affect  the  effectiveness  of  endof-
process  pollution  control.   Although  in-plant control can be managed
quite effectively in older plants, some of the technologies required for
reducing the raw waste loads to the low levels  that  are  possible  are
costly  to install in older plants.  For example, rerouting of sewers to
segregate waste streams is both very difficult and costly.

Small plants, for the reasons discussed in section IX, have more options
for waste control than do large plants.  It  is  anticipated  that  most
small plants will find land disposal the best choice.


                Total Cost of .Application in Relation to
                      Effluent Reduction Benefits^

Based  on  information  contained  in  Section  VIII of this report, the
industry as a whole would have to invest up to a maximum of $107 million
above that required to meet the 1977 standards.  This amounts to a  cost
of  about  $4760 for installed capacity of one million kg LWK ($2160 for
one million pounds) per year.  The operating cost increase  will  amount
                                  154

-------
to  about S2.10/1000 kg LWK ($0.96/1000 Ib LWK).  The capital investment
above that to meet the 1977 standards amounts to about  six  percent  of
the  total  investment of the industry, estimated at about $1.7 billion.
It also equals about 44 percent of the capital investment  reported  for
the industry for 1971.

All  plants  discharging  to  streams  can  implement the Best Available
Technology Economically Achievable; the technology is  not  affected  by
different processes used in the plants.


          Enqineering_Aspects of Control Technique Application

The  specified  level  of technology is achievable.  It is already being
met for BODS and suspended solids by one plant,  both  medium  and  large
plants  are  included.   The  limits  are  not  being  met, however, for
ammonia, Kjeldahl nitrogen, or phosphorus; newer technology is  required
for  these  parameters.   Phosphorus  is effectively removed by chemical
treatment in air flotation, and by filtration of the final effluent from
the secondary treatment.   The greatest  unknown  is  the  nitrification-
denitrification step.  However, nitrification has been achieved in pilot
units  and to a limited extent in plant operations.  Denitrification has
been explored successfully on  laboratory  and  pilot  scales.   Ammonia
stripping  may  require  pH adjustment and later neutralization; it is a
technology transferred from other industries.

Each  of  the  identified  technologies,  except  ammonia  removal,   is
currently  being  practiced in one or more packing plants.  They need to
be combined, however, to achieve the limits specified.

Technology for land disposal is being used by several plants  in  Texas;
it  is  already  being  planned  for  at least one plant in Iowa.  Other
industries,  e.g.,  potato  processing,  are   using   it   extensively.
Secondary treatment and large holding ponds may be required in the North
to  permit land disposal over only about one-half the year.  Application
of technology  for  greatly  reduced  water  use  will  facilitate  land
disposal.


                            Process Changes

In-plant  changes  will  be  needed  by  most  plants to meet the limits
specified.  These were outlined  in  the  "Identification  of  the  Best
Available Technology Economically Achievable", above.
                                  155

-------
                        Non-Water Quality Impact

The  major  impact  will  occur when the land disposal option is chosen.
There is a potential, but unknown,  long-term  effect  on  the  soil  of
irrigation  of  packing  plant  wastes.   To  date,  impacts  have  been
generally obviated by careful water application management.

otherwise, the effects will essentially be those  described  in  Section
IX,  where  it  was  concluded  that  no  new  kinds  of impacts will be
introduced.
                                  156

-------
    ;  '•' "  '                     SECTION XI

                   NEW SOURCE PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
   -: 'j' i"; •;'         "         •          -

                              INTRODUCTION

The effluent limitations that must be achieved by new sources are termed
performance standards.  The New Source Performance  Standards  apply  to
any  source  for  which construction starts after the publication of the
proposed regulations for the Standards.  The Standards are determined by
adding to the consideration underlying the identification  of  the  Best
Practicable  Control  Technology Currently Available, a determination of
what higher levels of pollution control are available through the use of
improved production processes and/or  treatment  techniques.   Thus,  in
addition  to  considering  the  best in-plant and end-of-process control
technology. New Source Performance Standards are based on an analysis of
how the level of effluent may be  reduced  by  changing  the  production
process  itself.   Alternative  processes,  operating  methods  or other
alternatives are considered.  However, the end result of the analysis is
to  identify  effluent  standards  which  reflect  levels   of   control
achievable  through the use of improved production processes (as well as
control technology),  rather  than  prescribing  a  particular  type  of
process  or  technology which must be employed.  A further determination
made is whether a standard permitting  no  discharge  of  pollutants  is
practicable.


Consideration must also be given to:

    o    operating methods;

    o    Batch, as opposed to continuous, operations;

    o    Use of alternative raw materials and mixes of raw materials;

    o    Use of dry rather than wet processes  (including substitution
         of recoverable solvents for water);

    o    Recovery of pollutants as by-products
                                  153

-------
             EFFLUENT REDUCTION ATTAINABLE FOR NEW SOURCES

The effluent limitation for new sources is the same as that for the Best
Practicable  Control  Technology  Currently Available for the pollutants
BOD, suspended solids, oil and grease,  pH,  and  fecal  coliforms.   In
addition  to  these pollutant parameters the following additional limits
on ammonia are required for new sources.   (See Section IX):
      Plant
   Subcategory

   Simple slaughterhouse

   Complex Slaughterhouse

   Low-Processing
   Packinghouse

   High-Processing
   Packinghouse
Ammonia

kg/kkg LWK


  0,17

  0.24


  0.24

  0.40
This limitation is  readily  achievable  in  newly  constructed  plants.
However,  the  guidelines for the Best Available Technology Economically
Achievable should be kept in mind; it may be  a  practical  approach  to
design  a  plant  which  approaches  the 1983 guidelines.  Consideration
should also be given to land disposal, which would be no  discharge;  in
many  cases  this  will  be  the  most attractive and economical option.
Additional adjustments in the ammonia limitation may be made for  plants
in  all  subcategories  for  the following processes involving materials
derived from animals slaughtered at other locations:
                                  158

-------
Table 18 - Adjustment Factors for Exceptions in Operations
           in any Plant Subcategory — New Source Performance
           Standards
 Exceptional Practice	

 Processing Blood in
 addition to own:
   Steam Coagulation

 Rendering Materials in
 addition to own:
   Wet or Low Temperature

   Dry
Adjustment Factor

   Ammonia
 kq/kkq ELWK*	
     0.03



     0.05

     0.02

 *Adjustments are for the average of daily values for any
  period of thirty consecutive days.  Daily maximum values
  are determined as a multiple of two times the thirty day
  average.
                         159

-------
            IDENTIFICATION OF NEW SOURCE CONTROL TECHNOLOGY

The technology is the same as that identified as  the  Best  Practicable
Control  Technology  Currently  Available  (see  Section  IX),   However,
certain steps that will be necessary to meet the 1983 guidelines -should
be considered and, where possible, incorporated.  These include:

o   In-Plant controls                           ,               •  -, . •

         Segregation of grease-bearing streams from nongrease-
         bearing waste streams;

         Water control systems and procedures to reduce water
         use considerably below those cited in Section IX;

         Processing or outside disposal of wet paunch contents.
         or rendering of unopened paunch.

         Installation of shel'l-io—tube or comparable systems for
         heat exchangers and evaporators;

         Provision for collection of excess cure solutions;

         Installation of dry rendering operations;
                      1    -                                            i
         General elimination of viscera washing operations;

         Design for extensive use of troughs under carcass conveying
         lines;
            i             ,            .
         Installation of dissolved air flotation, with provision
         for a second unit to be added later;

         Instigation and continuous enforcement of meticulous
         dry clean-up and materials recovery procedures.

o   End-of-Process Treatment

         Chemical and biological measures for nutrient removal,
         e.g. alum precipitation, nitrification-denitrification;
         Land disposal  (evaporation, irrigation) wherever possible;
         this should be a prime consideration;

         Sand filter or microscreen for effluent secondary treatment;

         Solid waste drying, composting, upgrading of protein content.

         Sludge recycle and/or digestion
                                  160

-------
   RATIONALE FOR SELECTION OF BEST AVAILABLE DEMONSTRATED TECHNOLOGY

In  addition  to  the discussion in Section tx on the rationale for Best
Practicable Control Technology Currently Available, additional  comments
are  presented  regarding  technology  for  the  added  limitations  for
nutrients.

Chemical precipitation for removal of phosphorus and residual  suspended
solids  is  an  accepted  practice  as a "polishing" step for biological
treated effluents particularly municipal wastes  which  contain  similar
concentrations  of  phosphorus  as  biologically  treated  meat  packing
wastes.  Moreover, the general concept  of  precipition  for  phosphorus
removal is now serving as the basis for guidelines utilized in the state
of North Carolina.

The  nitrite-nitrate limits are already being achieved by nine plants in
the State of Iowa (of  which  two  plants  simultaneously  meet  ammonia
requirements) .   High rate mechanical aeration to volatilize ammonia and
convert ammonia to nitrates is an accepted concept, as is  reduction  of
nitrates by anaerobic filters or similar denitrification systems.

With  further  regard  to  ammonia  control  as  part  of total nitrogen
removal, six plants within all sutcategories already meet the  specified
limits  using  well  operated treatment systems.  The ammonia removal is
perhaps incidental to the efficient BOD and suspended solids controls at
these plants  and  is  not  directly  attributable  to  specific  design
requirements.    However,  new  sources  may  be  availed  of most recent
advances in  systems  for  denitrifying  effluents  using  extended  air
activated  sludge,  nitrification-denitrification-nitrogen  gas removal,
final clarification, and  chlorination  with  expected  high  levels  of
nitrogen  control  as  outlined  in  the EPA Technology Transfer Manual,
"Nitrification-Denitrification Facilities, August, 1973",
                                  161

-------

-------
                              SECTION XII

                            ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The assistance of the North Star  Research  and  Development  Institute,
Minneapolis,  Minnesota  is  gratefully  appreciated.  Their program was
directed by Dr. E.E. Erickson; Project Engineers  were  Messrs  John  P.
Pilney  and  Robert  J.  Reid.  Special assistance was provided by North
Star staff members: Mrs. Janet McMenamin, Messrs R. H. Forester and  A.J.
Senechal, and Drs, L.W. Rust and L.L. Altpeter.


The  contributions  and advice of Mr. A.J. Steffen of Purdue University,
Mr. W.H. Miedaner of Globe Engineering, Mr. John  Macon,  and  Dr.  H.O.
Halverson  are  gratefully acknowledged.  Also, James and Paula Wells of
Bell, Galyardt, and Wells  made  invaluable  contributions  in  numerous
telephone conversations.

Special  thanks  are due Mr. Jeffery D. Denit, Project officer. Effluent
Guidelines Division for his guidance in the direction of the program and
for his invaluable help in carrying out  all  aspects  of  the  research
program.
Intra-agency  review,  analysis  and assistence was provided by the Meat
Products Working Group/Steering Committee comprised of the following EPA
personnel.  Mr. George Webster, Effluent Guidelines Division   (Chairman)
Mr.  Jeffery  D.  Denit, EGD, Project officer, Mr. George Keeler, Office
of Research & Development, Mr. Jack  Witherow,  Officer  of  Research  6
Development,  Mr.  Gary  Polvi,  EPA,  Region VIII, Mr. William Sonnett,
Office of Enforcement and General Counsel, Mr. Taylor Miller, Office  of
General Counsel, Mr. Swep Davis, Office of Planning and Evaluation.

The  cooperation  of  the  meat packing industry is greatly appreciated.
The American Meat  Institute,  the  National  Independent  Meat  Packers
Association  and  the  Western  States  Meat Packers Association deserve
special mention, as do many  companies  that  provided  information  and
cooperated in plant visits and sampling programs.

Various  Regional  EPA  offices  were most helpful in arranging for site
visits.  The plant data provided by Dr. Wm. Garner and Mr.  Ron  Wantock
of the Region VII office in Kansas City were especially appreciated.
     help  of  Dr. Dwight Ballinger of EPA in Cincinnati in establishing
sampling and testing procedures used for the field verification  studies
was, appreciated.
                                  163

-------
Various  offices  in  the United states Department of Agriculture, espe-
cially the Meat and Poultry Inspection  Division,  and  many  state  and
local  agencies  were  also  most helpful.  Among these, special mention
should go to the Iowa  Water  Quality  Commission,  the  state  of  Ohio
Environmental  Protection  Administration,  and  the  City and County of
Denver Water and Sanitation District.

Special thanks also go to Mr. Ross Frazier of the  Minnesota  Department
of Health for periodically running duplicate sets of BOD5 analyses.


The  diligence  and  patience of Mrs. Pearl Smith in helping to edit and
produce this iranuscript is gratefully acknowledged.
                                   164

-------
                             SECTION XIII

                               REFERENCES
1.  Livestock Slaughter, Annual Summary 1972, Statistical Reporting
    Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, April. 1973.

2.  The Cost of Clean Water, Industrial Waste Profile No. 8, Meat
    Products, U.S. Department of the Interior, Federal Water Pollution
    Control Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington.

3.  Pilney, J.P., Halvorson, H.O., and Erickson, E.E., Industrial Waste
    Study of the Meat Products Industry* Environmental Protection
    Agency, Contract No. 68-01-0031.

U.  Standard Industrial Classification Manual, Executive Office of the
    President, Office of Management and Budget, U.S. Government
    Printing Office, Washington, 1972.

5.  U.S. Industrial Outlookk, 1973, with Projections to 1980, U.S.
    Department of Commerce, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington.

6.  Macon, John A., Cote, Daniel N., Study of Meat Packing Wastes in
    North Carolina, Part I, Industrial Extension Service, School of
    Engineering, North Carolina State College, Raleigh, August 1961.

7.  Kerrigan, James E., Crandall, Clifford J., Rohlich, Gerard A.,
    The Significance of Waste Waters from the Meat Industry as Related
    to the Problems of Eutrophication, American Meat Institute, Chicago,
    November 1970.

8.  Industrial Waste Water Control: Chemical Technology, Volume 2,
    C. Fred Gurnham, Ed., Academic Press, New York, 1965.

9.  Wells, W. James, Jr., "How Plants Can Cut Rising Waste Treatment
    Expense", The National Provisioner  (July 4, 1970).

10.  Miedaner, W.H., "In-Plant Waste Control", The National Provisioner
    (August 19, 1972).

11.  Witherow, Jack L., Yin, S.C., and Farmer, David M., National Meat-
    packing waste Management Research and Development Program,
    Robert s. Kerr Environmental Research Lab., EPA, Ada, Oklahoma, 1973,

12.  Elimination of Water Pollution by Packinghouse Animal Paunch and
    Blood, Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Government Printing
    Office, Washington, November 1971.
                                   165

-------
13  Personal communication, W.H. Miedaner, 1973.

14. Basics of Pollution Control, Gurnham & Associates, prepared for
    Environmental Protection Agency, Technology Transfer Program,
    Kansas City, Mo., March 7-8, 1973, Chicago, Illinois.

15. An industrial Waste Guide to the Meat Industry, U.S. Department of
    Health, Education, and Welfare, Washington, revised 1965.

16. Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards, Revised  1962, U.S.
    Department of Health, Education and Welfare, U.S. Public Health
    Service Publication No. 956, U.S. Government printing Office,
    Washington, 1962.

17. steffen, A.J., In-plant Modifications to Reduce Pollution and
    Pretreatment of Meat Packing Waste Waters for Discharge to Municipal
    Systems, prepared for Environmental Protection Agency Technology
    Transfer Program, Kansas City, Missouri, March 7-8, 1973.

18. Water Quality Improvement by Physical and Chemical Processes,
    Earnest F. Gloyna and w. Wesley Eckenfelder, Jr., Eds., University
    of Texas Press, Austin, 1970.

19. Telephone communication with M. Hartman, Infilco Division, Westing-
    house, Richland, Virginia, May 1973.

20. Rosen, G.D., "Profit from Effluent", Poultry Industry  (April 1971).

21. Upgrading Meat Packing Facilities to Reduce Pollution: Waste
    Treatment Systems, Bell, Galyardt, Wells, prepared for Environmental
    Protection Agency Transfer Program, Kansas City, Missouri, March 7-8,
    1973, Omaha.

22. "Direct Oxygenation of Waste Water", Chemical Engineering  (November 29,
    1971) .

23. Gulp, Russell L., and Gulp, Gordon L., Advanced Waste Water Treatment,
    Van wostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1971.

24. Babbitt, Harold E., and Baumann, E. Robert, Sewerage and Sewage
    Treatment, Eighth ed., John Wiley S Sons, Inc., London, 1967.

25. Fair, Gordon Maskew, Geyer, John Charles, and Okun, Daniel
    Alexander, Water and Waste Water Engineering: Volume 2.  Water
    Purification and Waste water Treatment and Disposal, John Wiley &
    Sons, Inc., New York, 1968.

26. Personal communication, Thor Alexander and Gary Glazer, 1973.
                                   166

-------
27. Fair, Gordon Maskew, Geyer, John Charles, and okun, Daniel
    Alexander, Water and Waste water Engineering:  Volume 1.  Water
    Supply and Waste Water Removal, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
    1966.

28. Eckenfelder, W, Wesley, Jr., Industrial Water Pollution Control,
    McGraw-Hill Bock Company, New York, 1966.

29. Personal communication, C.E. Clapp, United States Department of
    Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, University of Minnesota,
    Minneapolis, May 1973.

30. Eliassen, Rolf, and Tchobanoglous, George, "Advanced Treatment
    Processes, Chemical Engineering   (October 14, 1968).

31. Knowles, Chester L., Jr., "Improving Biological Processes11,
    Chemical Engineering/Deskbook Issue (April 27, 1970).

32. Personal Communication, H.O. Halvorson, May 1973.

33. McGraw-Hill's 1972 Report on Business £ the Environment,
    Fred C. Price, Steven Ross and Robert L. Davidson, Eds.,
    McGraw-Hill Publications Co., New York, 1972.

31*. Rickles, Robert N., Membranes, Technology and Economics, 1967,
    Noyes Development corporation. Park Ridge, New Jersey.

35. Financial Facts About the Meat Packing Industry, 1971, American
    Meat Institute, Chicago, August 1972.

36. "Survey of Corporate Performance: First Quarter 1973", Business
    Week, p. 97 (May 12, 1973) .

37. 1967 Census of Manufactures, Bureau of the Census, U.S.  Department
    of Commerce, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1971.
38. Witherow, Jack L., "Small Meat Packers wastes Treatment Systems,"
    presented at the 4th National Symposium on Food Processing Wastes,
    Syracuse, New York, March 26-28, 1973.

39. Mccarty, P.L., "Anaerobic Waste Treatment Fundamentals—Part Two,
    Chemistry and Microbiology," Public Works, 95, 123 (October 1964).

40. Elimination of Water Pollution by Packinghouse Animal Paunch and Blood,
    by Beefland International,  Inc., for EPA, Project #12060 FDS, November
    1971.

41. Goodrich, R. D., and Meiske, J. C., The Value of Dried Rumen Contents
    As A ration for Finishing Steers, University of Minnesota Department
    of Animal Science in cooperation with Agricultural Extension Service
                                   167

-------
    and Agricultural Experiment Station, report B-124, 1969.

42. Pilot Plant Installation for Fungal Treatment of Vegetable Canning
    Wastes, by the Green Giant Company, for EPA, Grant No. 12060 EDZ,
    August 1971.

43. Church, Brooks D., Erickson, E. E., and Widmer, Charles M., "Fungal
    Digestion of Food Processing Wastes," Food Technology, 27, No. 2,

44. Preproposal to EPA, Ada, Oklahoma:  "Conversion of Rumen Contents of
    Beef Cattle to Fungal Protein," North Star Research and Development
    Institute, May 1972.

45. Chittenden, Jimmie A., and Wells, W. James, Jr., "BOD Removal and
    Stabilization of Anaerobic Lagoon Effluent Using a Rotating Biological
    Contactor," presented at the 1970 Annual Conference, Water Pollution
    Control Federation, Boston.

46. Private communication from Geo. A. Hormel & Company, Austin,
    Minnesota, 1973.


47. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, "Nitrification-
    Denitrification Facilities," Technology Transfer, August, 1973.
                                  168

-------
       ;                       SECTION XIV

                                GLOSSARY


Abattoir:  A slaughterhouse.

"Act":   The Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972.

Activated Sludge Process:  Aerated basin in which waste waters are
mixed with recycled biologically active sludge for periods of about
six hours.

Aerated:   The introduction and intimate contacting of air and a
liquid by mechanical means such as stirring, spraying, or bubbling.

Aerobic:   Living or occurring only in the presence of dissolved or
molecular oxygen.

Algae:   Major group.of lower plants, single and multi-celled,
usually aquatic and capable of synthesizing their foodstuff by
photosynthe si s.

Ammonia Stripping:   Ammonia removal from a liquid, usually by intimate
contacting with an ammonia-free gas such as air.

Anaerobic:   Living or active only in the absence of free oxygen.

Bacteria:   Primitive plants, generally free of pigment, which
reproduce by dividing in one, two, or three planes.  They occur as
single cells, chains,  filaments, well-oriented groups or amorphous
masses.  Most bacteria do not require light, but a limited number
are photosynthetic and draw upon light for energy.  Most bacteria
are heterotrophic (utilize organic matter for energy and for
growth materials), but a few are autotrophic and derive their bodily
needs from inorganic materials.

Barometric Condenser:    A mechanical device to condense vapors by the
direct and intimate contacting of thexvapors and the cooling water.

Bedding:   Material, usually organic, which is placed on the floor
surface of livestock buildings for animal comfort and to absorb urine
and other liquids, and thus promote cleanliness in the building.
                                   169

-------
Biological Oxidation:   The process whereby, through the activity of
living organisms in an aerobic environment, organic matter is
converted to more biologically stable matter.

Biological stabilization:   Reduction in the net energy level of
organic matter as a result of the metabolic activity of organisms,
so that further biodegradation is very slow.

Biological Treatment:   Organic waste treatment in which bacteria
and/or biochemical action are intensified under controlled conditions.

Blood Water (Serum):   Liquid remaining after coagulation of the blood,

Slowdown:  A discharge of water from a system to prevent a buildup
of dissolved solids in a boiler.

BODS:   A measure of the oxygen consumption by aerobic organisms
over a 5 day test period at 20°C.  It is an indirect measure of
the concentration of biologically degradable material present in
organic wastes contained in a waste stream.

Capacity-cost Relationship:   The variation of investment cost for
equipment or a total plant as a function of its size or capacity.

Capacity-Ratio Exponent  (n):   In capacity-cost relationships, cost
usually increases at a slower rate than capacity.  The ratio of
capacities of an exponential power  (n) in estimating investment cost
at one capacity, given the cost at a different capacity: e.g.,
(C1/C2)n (cost of C2 = Cost of d.

Carbon Adsorption:   The separation of small waste particles and
molecular species, including color and odor contaminants, by attach-
ment to the surface and open pore structure of carbon granules or
powder.  The carbon is usually "activated", or made more reactive
by treatment and processing.

Casings:   The cleaned intestines of cattle, hogs, or sheep used as a
case for processed meat such as sausage.

Category and Subcategory:   Divisions of a particular industry which
possess different traits that affect raw waste water quality.

Chemical Precipitation:   A waste treatment process whereby substances
dissolved in the waste water stream are rendered insoluble and form
a solid phase that settles out or can be removed by flotation
techniques.

Chitterling:   Large intestine of hogs.
                                  170

-------
Clarification:   Process of removing undissolved materials from a
liquid.  Specifically, removal of solids either by settling or
filtration.

Clarifier:   A settling basin for separating settleable solids from
Cm:   Centimeter.

Coagulant:   A material, which, when added to liquid wastes or water,
creates a reaction which forms insoluble floe particles that adsorb
and precipitate colloidal and suspended solids.  The floe particles
can be removed by sedimentation.  Among the most common chemical
coagulants used in sewage treatment are ferric sulfate and alum.

COD-Chemical Oxygen Demand:   An indirect measure of the biochemical
load imposed on the oxygen resource of a body of water when
organic wastes are introduced into the water.  A chemical test is
used to determine COD of waste water.

Composting:   Present-day composting is the aerobic, thermophilic
decomposition of organic wastes to a relatively stable humus.  The
resulting humus may contain up to 25% dead or living organisms and is
subject to further, slower decay but should be sufficiently stable
not to reheat or cause odor or fly problems.  In composting, mixing
and aeration are provided to maintain aerobic conditions.  The
decomposition is done by aerobic organisms, primarily thermophilic
bacteria, actinomycetes and fungi.  Heat generated provides the
higher temperatures the microorganisms require.

Contamination:   A general term signifying the introduction into water
of microorganisms, chemical, organic, or inorganic wastes, or sewage,
which renders the water unfit for its intended use.

Cracklings:  "The crisp solid residue left after the fat has been
separated from the fibrous tissue in rendering lard or tallow.

Curing:   A process, method, or treatment involving aging, seasoning,
washing, drying, injecting, heating, smoking or otherwise treating a
product, especially meat, to preserve, perfect, or ready it for use.

Denitrification:   The process involving the facultative conversion
by anaerobic tacteria of nitrates into nitrogen and nitrogen oxides.

Digestion:  Though "aerobic" digestion is used, the term digestion
commonly refers to the anaerobic breakdown of organic matter in water
solution or suspension into simpler or more biologically stable
compounds or both.  Organic matter may be decomposed to soluble
organic acids or alcohols, and subsequently converted to such gases
as methane and carbon dioxide.  Complete destruction of organic solid
materials by bacterial action alone is never accomplished.
                                  171

-------
Dissolved Air Flotation:   A process involving the compression of air
and liquid, mixing to super-saturation, and releasing the pressure to
generate large numbers of minute air bubbles.  As the bubbles rise to
the surface of the water, they carry with them small particles that
they contact.  The process is particularly effective for grease removal

Dissolved Oxygen:   The oxygen dissolved in sewage, water, or other
liquid, usually expressed as milligrams per liter or as percent of
saturation.

Effluents   Liquid which flows from a containing space or process unit.

Electrodialysis:   A physical separation process which uses membranes
and applied voltages to separate ionic species from water.

Eutrophication:   Applies to lake or pond - becoming rich in dissolved
nutrients, with seasonal oxygen deficiencies.

Evapotranspiration:   Loss of water from the soil, both by evaporation
and by transpiration from the plants growing thereon.

Extended Aeration:   A form of the activated sludge process except
that the retention time of waste waters is one to three days.

Facultative Bacteria:   Bacteria which can exist and reproduce under
either aerobic or anaerobic conditions.

Facultative Decomposition:   Decomposition of organic matter by
facultative microorganisms.

Feed:   A material which flows into a containing space or process unit.

Filtration:   The process of passing a liquid through a porous medium
for the removal of suspended material by a physical straining action.

Floe:   A mass formed by the aggregation of a number of fine suspended
particles.

Flocculation:   The process of forming larger masses from a large
number of finer suspended particles.

Floe Skimmings:   The flocculent mass formed on a quieted liquid
surface and removed for use, treatment, or disposal.

Full-Line Plant:   A packinghouse that slaughters and produces a
substantial quantity of processed meat products.
                                   172

-------
Green Hides:   Animal hides that may have been washed and trimmed,
but have not been treated, cured, or processed in any manner.

Hectare:   A metric measure of area equivalent to 100 ares  (also metric)
and 2.47 acres.

Hydrolyzing:   The reaction involving the decomposition of organic
materials by interaction with water in the presence of acids or
alkalies.  Hog hair and feathers, for example, are hydrolyzed to
a proteinacous product that has some feed value.

Influent:   A liquid which flows into a containing space or process unit,

Ion Exchange:   A reversible chemical reaction between a solid and a
liquid by means of which ions may be interchanged between the two.
It is in common use in water softening and water deionizing.
Kg;
 Kilogram or 1000 grams, metric unit of weight.
Kjeldahl Nitrogen:   A measure of the total amount of nitrogen in the
ammonia and organic forms in waste water.
KWH:
  Kilowatt-hours, a measure of total electrical energy consumption.
Lagoon:   An all-inclusive term commonly given to a water impoundment
in which organic wastes are stored or stabilized or both.

Locker Plant:   Very small meat packing plant that slaughters
animals and may produce processed meat products, it stores meat in
frozen form for its customers.

LWK:   Live weight killed, a measure of production in a meat packing
plant, commonly expressed in thousands of kilograms or pounds per day.
M:
Meter, metric unit of length.
Micrometer:   Also micron, a metric measure of length equal to one
millionth of a meter or 39 millionths of an inch.
Mm:
 Millimeter = 0.001 meter.
Mg/1:   Milligrams per liter; approximately equals parts per million;
a term used to indicate concentration of materials in water.

MGD or MGPD:   Million gallons per day.

Microstrainer/microscreen:   A mechanical filter consisting of a
cylindrical surface of metal filter fabric with openings of 20-60
micrometers in size.
                                  173

-------
Municipal Treatment:   A city or community-owned waste treatment plant
for municipal and, possibly, industrial waste treatment.

New source:   Any building, structure, facility, or installation from
which there is or may be a discharge of pollutants and whose con-
struction is commenced after the publication of the proposed
regulations.

Nitrate, Nitrite:   Chemical compounds that include the NO3-  (nitrate)
and NO2-  (nitrite) ions.  They are composed of nitrogen and oxygen,
are nutrients for growth of algae and other plant life, and contribute
to eutrophication.

Nitrification:   The process of oxidizing ammonia by bacteria into
nitrites and nitrates.

No Discharge:   No discharge of effluent to a water course.  A
system of land disposal with no run-off or total recycle of the
waste water may be used to achieve it,

Non-Water Quality:   Thermal, air, noise and all other environmental
parameters except water.

Offal:   The parts of a butchered animal removed in eviscerating and
trimming that may be used as edible products or in production of
inedible by-products.

Off-Gas:   The gaseous products of a process that are collected for
use or more typically vented directly, or through a flare, into
the atmosphere.

Organic content:   Synonymous with volatile solids except for Small
traces of some inorganic materials such as calcium carbonate which
will lose weight at temperatures used in determining volatile solids.

Oxidation Lagoon:   Synonymous with aerobic or aerated lagoon.

Oxidation Pond:   Synonymous with aerobic lagoon.

Packinghouse:   Meat packing plant that slaughters animals and also
produces manufactured meat products such as weiners, sausage, canned
meats, cured products, etc.

Paunch:   The first stomach, or rumen of cattle, calves, and sheep.
The contents are sometimes included in the term.

Paunch manure:   Contents of the paunch.
                                   174

-------
Peck:   The second stomach of a ruminant.

Pens  (Holding pens):   The area or building for holding live animals
at meat packing plants prior to slaughter.

Percolation:   The movement of water througi) the so£l j?ro£H$9
                                               i
pH:   A measure of the relative acidity or alkalinity of water.  A
pH of 7.0 indicates a neutral condition.  A greater pH indicates
alkalinity and a lower pH indicates acidity.  A one unit change in
pH indicates a ten fold change in the concentration^ of hydrogen
ion.

Pickle solution:   A water solution that may contain salt, sugar,
curing or pickling agents, preservatives, and other chemicals.  It-
is used for injection or soaking of meat to prepare finished meat
products.

Pollutant:   A substance which taints,, fouls, or otherwise renders
impure or unclean the recipient system.

Pollution:   The presence of pollutants in a system sufficient to
degrade the quality of the system.

Polishing:   Final treatment stage before discharge of effluent to a
water course, carried out in a shallow, aerobic lagoon or pond,
mainly to remove fine suspended solids that settle very slowly.
Some aerobic microbiological activity, also, occurs.

Polyelectrolyte Chemicals:   High molecular weight substances which
dissociate into ions when in solution; the ions either being bound
to the molecular structure or free, to diffuse throughout the solvent,
depending on the sign of the ionic charge and the type of electrolyte.
They are often used as flocculating agents in waste water treatment,
particularly along with dissolved air flotation.

Ponding:   A waste treatment technique involving the actual holdup of
all waste waters in a confined space with evaporation and percolation
the primary mechanisms operating to dispose of the water.

Ppm:   Parts per million, a measure of .concentration, expressed
currently as ing/I.

Pretreatment:   Waste Water treatment located on the plant site and
upstream from the discharge to a municipal treatment system.

Primary Waste Treatment:   In-Plant by-product recovery and waste water
treatment involving physical separation and recovery devices such as
catch basins, screens, and dissolved air flotation.
                                  175

-------
Processing:   Manufacture of sausages, hams, canned meats, smoked meat
products, etc., from fresh meat cuts or ground meats.

Process Water:   All-water that comes into direct contact with the
raw materials, intermediate products, final products, by-products,
or contaminated waters ,and air.

Raceway:   Circular shaped vat containing brine, agitated by a
paddle wheel and used  for brine curing of hides.

Raw Waste:   The waste water effluent from the in-plant primary waste
treatment system.

Recycle:   The return of a quantity of effluent from a specific unit
or process to the feed stream of that same unit.  This would also
apply to return of treated plant waste water for several plant uses.

Rendering:   Separation of fats and water from tissue by heat or
physical energy.

Return-on-Assets (RQA):   A measure of potential or realized profit as
a percent of the total assets  (or fixed assets) used to generate
the profit.

Heturn-on-Investment  (ROI):   A measure of potential or realized profit
as a percentage of the investment required to generate the profit.

Reuse:   Water reuse, the subsequent use of water following an
earlier use without restoring it to the original quality.

Reverse Osmosis:   The physical separation of substances from a
water stream by reversal of the normal osmotic process; i.e., high
pressure, forcing water through a semi-permeable membrane to the
pure water side leaving behind more concentrated waste streams.

Riprap:   A foundation or sustaining wall usually of stones and brush,
so placed on an embankment or a lagcon to prevent erosion.

Rotating Biological Contractor:   A waste treatment device involving
closely spaced light-weight disks which are rotated through the
waste water allowing aerobic microflora to accumulate on each disk
and thereby achieving  a reduction in the waste content.

Rumen:   The large first compartment of the stomach of a ruminant;
see paunch.

Sand Filter:   A filter device incorporating a bed of sand that,
depending on design, can be used in secondary or tertiary waste
                                  176

-------
•treatment.

secondary Processes:   Edible and inedible rendering and the processing
of blood, viscera, hide, and hair,

Sedimentation Tank:   A tank or basin in which a liquid  (water, sewage,
liquid manure) containing settleable suspended solids is retained
for a sufficient time so part of the suspended solids settle out by
gravity.  The time interval that the liquid is retained in the tank
is called "detention period".  In sewage treatment, the detention
period is short enough to avoid putrefaction.

Secondary Treatment:   The waste treatment following primary in-
plant treatment/ typically involving biological waste reduction
systems.

semipermeable Membrane:   A thin sheet-like structure which permits
the passage of solvent but is impermeable to dissolved substances.

Septic:   A condition characterized by or producing bacterial
decomposition; anaerobic.
settling Tank:   Synonymous with "Sedimentation Tank".

Sewage:   Water after it has been fouled by various uses.  From the
standpoint of source it may be a combination of the liquid or water-
carried wastes from residences, business buildings, and institutions,
together with those from industrial and agricultural establishments,
and with such groundwater, surface water, and storm water as may be
present.

Shock Load:   A quantity of waste water or pollutant that greatly
exceeds the normal discharged into a treatment system, usually
occurring over a limited period of time.

Slaughterhouse:   Meat packing plant that slaughters animals to produce
fresh meats.  It does not produce manufactured meat products such as
weiners, sausage, canned meats, etc.

Sludge:   The accumulated settled solids deposited from sewage or other
wastes, raw or treated, in tanks or basins, and containing more or
less water to form a semi-liquid ma.ss.

Slurry:   A solids-water mixture, with sufficient water content to
impart fluid handling characteristics to the mixture.

stick or Stickwater:   The concentrated (thick)  liquid product from
evaporating the tankwater from rendering operations.  It is added
to solids and may be further dried for feed ingredients.
                                  177

-------
Stoichiometric Amount:   The amount of a substance involved in a
specific chemical reaction, either as a reactant or as a reaction
product.

SS:   Suspended solids; solids that either float on the surface of,
or are in suspension, in water; and which are largely removable by
laboratory filtering as in the analytical determinate of SS content
of waste water.

Surface Water:   The waters of the United States including the
territorial seas.

Tankwater:   The water phase resulting from rendering processes,
usually applied to wet rendering.

Tertiary Waste Treatment:   Waste treatment systems used to treat
secondary treatment effluent and typically using physical-chemical
technologies to effect waste reduction.  Synonymous with "Advanced
Waste Treatment".

Toltal Dissolved Solids (TDS) :   The solids content of waste water that
is1 soluble and is measured as total solids content minus the
suspended solids.
Tripe:
rumen.
The edible product prepared from the walls of the paunch or
Viscera:   All internal organs of an animal that are located in the
great cavity of the trunk proper.

Zero Discharge:   The discharge of no pollutants in the waste water
stream of a plant that is discharging into a receiving body of water.
                                  178

-------
                                          METRIC UNITS
                                        CONVERSION TABLE
 MULTIPLY  (ENGLISH UNITS)

   ENGLISH UNIT       ABBREVIATION

 acre                    ac
 acre - feet             ac ft
 British Ihermal         BTU
   Unit
 British Thermal         BTU/Ib
   Unit/pound
 cubic feet/minute
 cubic feet/second
 cubic feet
 cubic feet
 cubic inches
 degree Fahrenheit
 feet
 gallon
 gallon/minute
 horsepower
 inches
 inches of mercury
 pounds
 million gallons/day
 mile
 pound/square inch
    (gauge)
yfequare feet
 square inches
 tons  (short)

 yard                    yd
     by

 CONVERSION

   0.405
1233.5
   0.252

   0.555
     TO OBTAIN  (METRIC UNITS)
ABBREVIATION

   ha
   cu m
   kg cal
   kg
cfm
cfs
cu ft
cu ft
cu in
°F
ft
gal
gpn
hp
in
in Hg
Ih
mgd
mi
psig
sq ft
sq in
ton
0.028
1.7
0.028
28.32
16.39
0.555 (°F-32)*
0.3048
3.785
0.0631
0.7457
2.54
0.03342
0.454
3,785
1.609
(0.06805 psig +1)*
0.0929
6.452
0.907
cu m/min
cu m/min
cu m
1
cu cm
°C
m
1
I/sec
kw
cm
atari
kg
cu m/day
km
atm
sq m
sq cm
kkg
   0.9144
                      m
  METRIC UNIT

hectares
cubic meters
kilogram-calories

kilogram calories/
 kilogram
cubic meters/minute
cubic meters/minute
cubic meters
liters
cubic centimeters
degree Centigrade
meters
liters
liters/second
kilowatts
centimeters
atmospheres
kilograms
cubic meters/day
kilometer
atmospheres
  (absolute)
square meters
square centimeters
metric tons
  (1000 kilograms)
meters
 *Actual conversion,  not a multiplier
                                            179
                                                                 *U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE:1974 546-319/389 1-3

-------

-------

-------

-------

-------
                                                   l-.f  -
~.i?~^-,-"~-,.
--.-*-f- ---.  ----- = - -- ~

                                                - --^l-

                                                :"  - -I-
                                                 ~-  f
                                                .- •  4
                                                    -»



-------